JP3348096B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

[0001]

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION 1. Field of the Invention The present invention relates to a game machine such as a so-called fever machine, a blade game machine such as a blade, a right thing, or an arrangement ball, and a coin game machine such as a slot machine.

[0002]

2. Description of the Related Art There is a group of game machines generally referred to as pachinko machines, which are called combination ball game machines (arranged ball-type pachinko machines). This is, for example, 16
You can hit a number of game balls, directly into the entrance provided in the downflow path of the game balls, or the entrance in the case in which the number from 1 to 16 is written on the front side of the lower part of the board Each time the player enters, the corresponding number portion of the case is lit, and if this is lit in a predetermined combination in one game, a score corresponding to the combination is given, and payout of a considerable game ball or the like based on the total score. Is performed.

[0003]

However, in the conventional combination type ball game machine, the control form of the provision of the compensation for the establishment of the entering ball combination is uniform, and there is a problem that the surprisingness is poor. On the other hand, in the combination type ball game machine, a so-called guidance increasing device mechanism is formed for the purpose of increasing unexpectedness and gambling, and when a special game state set in advance is generated based on starting entering ball etc. , The entry of the game ball into the accessory actuation port (score increasing device) in the guidance increasing device mechanism becomes effective,
Models that allow players to get many points are also becoming popular. However, in these models, the player's attention is focused only on the same function as a normal first-class pachinko machine (so-called Seven machine), such as starting ball entry and occurrence of a big hit, and a combination ball game machine There is a case where a special game entertainment is overlooked.

[0004] Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine such as a combination ball game machine with a surprising effect on the control mode of the game state accompanying the establishment of a ball-in combination, and further enhance the original entertainment interest of the combination system. It is to provide a gaming machine capable of.

[0005]

Means for Solving the Problems and Effects of the Invention In order to solve the above problems, a first aspect of a gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
There is an upper limit on the number of game balls that can be used in one game, and a combination display device for displaying a plurality of entrances provided on a game board and a winning symbol corresponding to the entrance where a game ball has entered. And a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player due to establishment of a predetermined execution condition set in advance, and changing the combination of winning symbols displayed on the combination display device for each game. A combination changing means for providing a game value corresponding to the score to a player when a score is established by the combination of the winning symbols displayed in the ball, and a predetermined execution condition set in advance. Characterized in that there is provided a score establishment opportunity increasing means for increasing opportunities for players to achieve a score due to the establishment of

[0006] According to this gaming machine, the combination display device is displayed for each game, the combination of winning symbols is changed at random, and the player is given an opportunity to achieve a score due to the establishment of the predetermined execution condition. As a result,
It is possible to increase the possibility of achieving a score other than during the special game, and a more appropriate and more interesting game without relying only on the configuration of the game board surface may be possible.

[0007] The "establishment of the predetermined execution condition" relating to the special game is not limited to the execution of a general hit / fail judgment, but the establishment of a precondition for the hit / fail judgment (for example, a ball entering a starting port). Depending on the result of the success / failure determination (change in the case of a hit or a miss) or an operation subsequent to the success / failure determination (for example, the occurrence of a special game right or the operation of an accessory during a special game), etc. It includes any of a series of events as an opportunity.

[0008] Further, the combination change trigger relating to the combination of the winning symbols includes a start (or end) of one game (or a plurality of games), an output from a fired ball detection sensor, a lapse of a predetermined time from the launch of a game ball, and fluctuations. Confirmation of symbols, starting of (or ending) the operation of the accessory such as the accessory operation port, the guidance increase device, and the score increasing device, and the lapse of a predetermined time (or a predetermined number of games) from the start (or end) of the operation of these accessories ,
Either the start (or the end) of the special game, or a combination thereof can be considered.

[0009] Further, "establishment of predetermined execution conditions" related to increasing the chances of establishment of a score includes displaying a winning pattern of a specific winning symbol, determining a specific variable symbol, determining a character operating port,
Either the start (or the end) of a specific accessory such as a guidance increasing device, a score increasing device, or the like, or a combination thereof can be considered. In addition, an increase in the chance of achieving a score is, for example, a configuration in which a combination of winning symbols is easy to achieve a score for a player, that is, a winning symbol in which a score is easily established if a normal game is played. Is displayed on the combination display device.

[0010] The above gaming machine can also be considered as the following configuration. That is, the combination display device that displays the identification information related to the ball entry of the game medium to the plurality of ball entrances (ball entry areas) in the unit game and the ball display, and the predetermined execution condition set in advance is satisfied. A special game generating device that generates a special game state that is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and a combination change that is displayed on the combination display device for each unit game and changes the combination of identification information Means for providing a player with a game value according to the score when a score is established by a combination of the identification information displayed in the ball entry, and a predetermined execution condition set in advance is satisfied. For this reason, it is possible to provide a score establishment opportunity increasing means for increasing the opportunity for the player to achieve the score.

[0011] The score formation opportunity increasing means controls the combination of the winning symbols displayed on the combination display device to display a combination having a high possibility of achieving at least one score in one game. Can be. According to this gaming machine, the winning symbol combinations include those having a high possibility of achieving one score in one game, so that the winning balls and the like are relatively likely to be paid out. Without reducing the willingness to play the game, it may be possible for the game store to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

[0012] The score formation opportunity increasing means may perform control for continuously displaying a combination of winning symbols related to the score formation on the combination display device until a predetermined score is formed. According to this gaming machine, a combination of winning symbols related to the establishment of a score is continuously displayed until a predetermined score is established, so that the player can be guaranteed the achievement of the score to some extent in practice. It may be possible to acquire more game values as compared with the combination game machine. Therefore,
A player may be able to improve the operating rate of a gaming machine for a gaming shop without decreasing the willingness to play.

The satisfaction of the predetermined execution condition may be characterized in that a special game right is generated by the operation of the guidance increasing device. The satisfaction of the predetermined execution condition may be characterized in that a specific winning symbol combination is displayed on the combination display device. Further, the satisfaction of the predetermined execution condition may be characterized in that no score is satisfied after a lapse of a predetermined number of games. According to such a gaming machine, the score establishment opportunity increasing means operates when each of the above-mentioned execution conditions is satisfied.

Next, in order to solve the above problems, different configurations of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. The configuration described below can also be configured in combination with the configuration of the gaming machine of the first aspect.

(Second Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information related to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable display device that variably displays one or more symbols based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device, and, when the symbols are fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the variable relative to the player. A first variable ball-entering device that changes to an advantageous state (including a state in which the first accessory-guiding device is activated and the first accessory-operating port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player) and a specific entry; A special ball entry device having a ball region and a non-specific ball entry region, and a special game in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than in the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry region. Features that generate a game state A game generating device, and a second variable ball-in device (second character guiding device) that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the character operation detecting device during the special game state. The second prize mode is changed based on the valid ball entry to the second variable ball entry device, and the device is activated to change the second accessory operation port to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player). And a prize mode increasing device that can be relatively advantageous for the player.

Such a gaming machine has two game states, a normal state (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal state) and a special game state. In the normal state, the relatively variable state is obtained for the player by the operation of the first variable pitching device based on the symbol display, and further, the game medium enters the specific pitching area in the specific pitching device. , The player enters a special game state, and the player can obtain an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can aim at the start detecting device to obtain a prize such as a score, and the player can aim at the specific ball-entering device to generate a special game state, thereby increasing the prize such as the score. Can be enjoyed. In particular, in the variable display device, if the probability that a specific display mode is fixedly displayed is increased, the rate at which the first variable ball entry device changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player is also increased, so that a prize is obtained. This makes it easier to reduce the player's willingness to play in the normal state. On the other hand, it may be possible for a game arcade to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, the above-described accessory guiding device refers to a device that operates to change the above-mentioned accessory operating port to a state that is relatively advantageous for the player (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, the start detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in a start ball entry device or a start passage device. It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

[0017] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the first variable ball entry device or the second variable ball entry device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into any of the variable ball-entering devices and the like, and the prize mode is advantageous for the player. Further, assuming that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different between the first variable ball-entering device and the second variable ball-entering device, the operating condition of any variable ball-entering device, that is, the start detection device or Depending on which of the accessory operation detecting devices detects the game medium (that is, whether the game medium passes or enters), it may be possible to give the player a higher level of entertainment.

The start detecting device, the variable display device, and the first variable ball-in device constitute a game device group for a first game mode. In addition, the first variable ball entry device can show different variation modes based on the type or combination of symbols that are definitely displayed on the variable display device. Specifically, a pair of movable pieces is provided in the first variable ball-entering device, and the movable piece is in an open state to be in an advantageous state for entering the ball, and the time for which the open state is continued depends on the type of the symbol. Alternatively, it may be relatively different depending on the combination. In this case, it may be possible to give the player a higher level of entertainment interest depending on the form of the symbol to be confirmed and displayed. The first game mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. Thus, in the normal state, it is easy to obtain a prize mode if the player hits the game area generally on the left side, and it may be possible for a game beginner to easily understand the game method.

Next, the specific ball-in device constitutes a game device for the second game mode, and the game device for the second game mode has a game mode independent of the game device group for the first game mode. Can be configured. In other words, by hitting the game device for the second game mode, it may be possible for the player to actively aim for the generation of the special game state. Note that the gaming device for the second gaming mode may be provided at a substantially central portion of a gaming area formed on a gaming board surface. In addition, when the first game mode gaming device group is arranged on the left half surface side from the center of the game area, the player can aim and hit the left side from the substantially central portion to win a prize or special through a series of game flows. It may be easier to obtain the occurrence of a gaming state.

Further, the accessory detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a third game mode game device group, and the third game mode game device group is provided in the first game mode game device group. The game mode can be configured independently of the gaming device group. Note that the gaming device group for the third gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. in this case,
The player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special gaming state by aiming at the right half side from the center of the gaming area.

(Third Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device, a first variable ball-in device (the first role-guiding device is operated, and the first role-actuating opening is relatively small for the player). And a variable display device for variably displaying one or more symbols based on the detection of the game medium by the start detection device, and temporarily storing the detected game medium. A storage device that can be stored, and the stored game media can be guided to either a specific ball entry area or a non-specific ball entry area, and the symbol is displayed on the variable display device in a specific display. In the mode When displayed, the prize mode is in a normal state based on the start detection device including a guiding device for guiding the game medium to the specific ball-in area, and based on the ball-in of the game medium in the specific ball-in area. A special game generating device that generates a special game state that is relatively more advantageous to the player than to the player, based on the detection of the game medium by the detecting device for operating the character during the special game state, and relatively to the player. A second variable ball-entering device that changes to an advantageous state (including a state in which the second accessory-operating device is activated and the second accessory-operating port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player); A prize mode increasing device that can make the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective ball entry into the two-variable ball input apparatus.

Such a gaming machine has two game states: a normal state (hereinafter, also referred to as a normal state) and a special game state. In the normal state, the operation of the first variable pitching device based on the detection of the game medium by the specific detection device provides the player with a relatively advantageous state, and furthermore, the ball entering the start detection device (ie, starting). Based on the display mode of the symbol variably displayed by the detection by the detection device), the entered game medium is guided to the specific entry area to enter a special game state, and the player can obtain an advantageous state. Therefore, the player aims at the specific detection device to obtain a prize such as a score, and the player aims at the start detection device to generate a special game state, and as a result, increases the prize such as a score. It may be possible to enjoy. In particular, in the variable display device, if the probability that a specific display mode is fixedly displayed is increased, the rate at which the special game state occurs, that is, the second variable ball entry device changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player. Since the ratio is also increased, a prize can be easily obtained, and the player's willingness to play can be reduced. On the other hand, it may be possible for a game arcade to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. Note that the start detection device may be a game medium detection switch provided in a start ball entry device or a start passage device, and the specific detection device may be a game medium detection switch provided in a specific ball entry device or a specific passage device. The switch, and also the accessory actuation detection device, may be a game medium detection switch provided in the accessory actuation ball-in device or the accessory actuation passage device.

[0023] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entering of the game medium into the first variable ball-entering device, the second variable ball-entering device, or the start detecting device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into any of the variable ball-entering devices and the like, and the prize mode is advantageous for the player. Also, assuming that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different between the first variable pitching device and the second variable pitching device,
The player can be further determined according to which operating condition of the variable ball-entering device, that is, which of the above-mentioned specific detecting device or the accessory-operating detecting device detects the game medium (that is, passes or enters). It may be possible to give a high entertainment interest.

The specific detecting device and the first variable ball-in device constitute a first gaming mode gaming device group. In particular, the first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. Thus, in the normal state, it is easy to obtain a prize mode if the player hits the game area generally on the left side, and it may be possible for a game beginner to easily understand the game method.

Further, the start detection device and the variable display device constitute a game device group for a second game mode. In particular,
The second game mode gaming device group may constitute a game mode independently of the first game mode game device group. That is, by hitting the game device group for the second game mode, the player may be able to actively aim at the occurrence of the special game state. In addition, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be provided at a substantially central portion of a gaming area formed on a gaming board surface.
In addition, when the first game mode gaming device group is arranged on the left half surface side from the center of the game area, the player can aim and hit the left side from the substantially central portion to win a prize or special through a series of game flows. It may be easier to obtain the occurrence of a gaming state.

Further, the accessory actuation detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a third game mode game device group, and the third game mode game device group is provided in the first game mode game device group. The game mode can be configured independently of the gaming device group. Note that the gaming device group for the third gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. in this case,
The player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special gaming state by aiming at the right half side from the center of the gaming area.

(Fourth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of game media into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable display device for variably displaying one or more symbols based on detection of a game medium by the detection device, a storage device capable of temporarily storing the detected game medium, and the storage device The game medium can be guided to either a specific ball entry area or a non-specific ball entry area, and when the symbol is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the game medium is identified. The starting detection device including a guiding device that guides the player to the ball entry area, and a special game in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area. Play A special game generation device that generates a state, the special game state includes a plurality of states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different, and the plurality of states are based on the entering of a game medium into the specific entering area. A lottery device for performing a lottery in any one of the states, and a variable entry that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the accessory operation detecting device during the special game state. The prize is based on a ball device (including that the accessory guiding device is activated and the accessory operating port is changed to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player) and the valid ball input to the variable ball input device. A prize mode increasing device that can make the mode relatively advantageous to the player.

In such a gaming machine, a special game state generated based on a specific display mode of a symbol on the variable display device includes a plurality of states having relatively different degrees of advantage for the player. . Therefore, the player can enjoy a plurality of gaming states as the special gaming state, and can give a high gaming interest even in the special gaming state which can be monotonous in the conventional gaming machine. Further, even when the symbol is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the game medium stored by the storage device is guided to the specific ball entry area by the guidance device to generate a special game state. Because of this, it may be possible to give a high game interest to the player also depending on the game mode up to the occurrence of the special game state. Further, the lottery device increases the fun factor for the player in which of the special game states the lottery is performed. On the other hand, since it may be possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player, it may be possible for the gaming shop to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, the starting detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in the starting ball entry device or the starting passage device. It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

[0029] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the variable ball-entering device or the start detecting device. In this case, the identification information on the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into the variable ball-entering device or the like, so that the prize mode is advantageous for the player. Further, if it is assumed that the entering of the ball into the variable entering device is effective only in the special game state, it may be possible to give a higher interest to the player by the game in the special game state.

The start detecting device, the variable display device, and the lottery device constitute a first gaming mode gaming device group. In particular, the first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the special game state by hitting the game area on the left side, and also makes it possible for a beginner to easily understand the game method.

Further, the accessory actuation detecting device and the variable ball input device constitute a gaming device group for a second game mode.
In particular, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area formed on the game board surface. In this case, the player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting from the center of the game area to the right half side.

The lottery device can perform a lottery by variably displaying one or a plurality of judgment symbols and confirming and displaying a predetermined judgment symbol from the one or plural judgment symbols. In this way, if one of the plurality of special game states is selected by lottery according to the symbol, the interest of the game by displaying the symbol further increases. Further, the lottery device may perform a lottery in a display area formed on the variable display device. In this case, the variable display device can display a symbol (special symbol) that can be a trigger for a special game state and the determination symbol,
Only when the special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the specific display mode that triggers the occurrence of the special game state, the lottery device is operated, the determination symbol is variably displayed, and the symbol can be confirmed and displayed. . Thereby, a plurality of game modes can be added to one variable display device, and the display mode can provide a high game interest to the player. Further, the number of gaming machines is reduced, which contributes to cost reduction.

A plurality of states having different degrees of advantage in the special game state can have different numbers of unit games in the special game state. By doing in this way, the degree of advantage in the plurality of special game states is clearly different, and the player can further enjoy which of the plurality of special game states is selected by lot.

Next, of the specific display modes (hereinafter, also referred to as a first display mode) determined and displayed on the variable display device, the display is determined in a further special display mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a second display mode). When displayed, the variable display device may include a probability changing unit that changes a probability that the first display mode is definitely displayed after the special game state ends. In this case, when the final display is made in the second display mode, the probability that the next special game state will occur after the end of the special game state is more advantageous to the player than usual, and a large amount of prizes can be obtained. Can be possible. Therefore, it is possible to give a further game interest to the player by the display mode on the variable display device. Specifically, the specific display mode includes a symbol for changing probability and a symbol for changing non-probability, and the probability changing unit may operate when the symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol for changing probability. it can.

(Fifth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information related to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, It has a ball entry area and a non-specific ball entry area,
Based on the detection of the game medium by the specific detection device, a first variable ball-in device (the first role-guiding device is activated and the first role-actuating opening is changed for the player) to change to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player. (Including changing to a relatively favorable state)
And a special game generation device that generates a special game state in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area,
The special game state includes a plurality of states in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different, and based on the entry of the game medium into the specific entry area, a lottery is selected from among the plurality of states. And a second lottery device that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the accessory operation detecting device during the special game state.
A variable ball-entering device (including that the second character-portion guiding device is operated and the second character-port opening is changed to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player); And a prize mode increasing device that can make the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on a good ball entry.

[0036] In such a gaming machine, the special game state generated based on the entry of the game medium into the specific entry area includes a plurality of states having relatively different degrees of advantage for the player. I have. Therefore, the player can enjoy a plurality of gaming states as the special gaming state, and can give a high gaming interest even in the special gaming state which can be monotonous in the conventional gaming machine. In addition, the lottery device increases the fun factor for the player in which of the special game states is selected. on the other hand,
Since it may be possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player, it may be possible for the gaming shop to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, the specific detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in a specific ball entry device or a specific passage device, and the detection device for the role actor is also a ball entry device for the role actor or for the role actor It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

[0037] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the first variable ball-entering device or the second variable ball-entering device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into any of the variable ball-entering devices and the like, and the prize mode is advantageous for the player.

The specific detecting device, the first variable ball-entering device, and the lottery device constitute a gaming device group for a first gaming mode. In particular, the first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the special game state by hitting the game area on the left side, and also makes it possible for a beginner to easily understand the game method.

In addition, the accessory actuation detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a game device group for a second game mode. In particular, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area formed on the game board surface. In this case, the player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting from the center of the game area to the right half side.

The lottery device may perform a lottery by variably displaying a plurality of judgment symbols and confirming and displaying a predetermined judgment symbol from the plurality of judgment symbols. In this way, if one of the plurality of special game states is selected by lottery according to the symbol, the interest of the game by displaying the symbol further increases. Also, the lottery device,
The first variable ball entry device can be provided. In this case, a further game mode element is added to the variable ball-in device, which further enhances the gaming interest for the player and reduces the number of gaming devices, thereby contributing to cost reduction. In addition, in the lottery device (determination symbol display device), a plurality of display regions of the determination symbol can be provided, and in that case, the special game state can be determined by a combination of the determination symbols. For example,
A plurality of judgment symbols can be displayed in each display area, and the combination of the judgment symbols that are definitely displayed in each display area is stored in a storage device in advance in association with the type of the special game state, and a predetermined , The corresponding special game state type can be read from the storage device.

A plurality of states having different degrees of advantage in the special game state can have different numbers of unit games in the special game state. By doing in this way, the degree of advantage in the plurality of special game states is clearly different, and the player can further enjoy which of the plurality of special game states is selected by lot.

(Sixth aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device, a first variable ball-in device (the first role-guiding device is operated, and the first role-actuating opening is relatively small for the player). And a variable display device for variably displaying one or more symbols based on the entering of game media into the first variable ball-in device, and the first variable ball-in device. A storage device capable of temporarily storing the game medium that has entered the ball device, and the stored game medium being able to be guided to either a specific ball-in area or a non-specific ball-in area. And in the variable display device, When the pattern is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode, the prize mode is usually set based on a guiding device for guiding the game medium to the specific ball-in area and a ball-in of the game medium in the specific ball-in area. A special game generating device that generates a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the state, and a special game generating device that generates a special game state during the special game state. A second variable ball entry device that changes to a state that is advantageous to the player (including that the second character object guiding device is operated and the second character object operation port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player); and A prize mode increasing device capable of making the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective ball entry into the second variable pitch apparatus.

In such a gaming machine, a special gaming state is generated based on a specific display mode of symbols on the variable display device. The trigger of operation of the variable display device is based not only on the detection of the game medium by the start detection device but also on the entry of a ball into the first variable ball entry device which is activated by the detection of the specific detection device. Therefore, the game for operating the variable display device does not become monotonous, and it may be possible to provide a gaming interest that does not exist in conventional gaming machines. Further, even when the symbol is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the game medium stored by the storage device is guided to the specific ball entry area by the guidance device to generate a special game state. Because of this, it may be possible to give a high game interest to the player also depending on the game mode up to the occurrence of the special game state. On the other hand, since it may be possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player, it may be possible for the gaming shop to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, the specific detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in a specific ball entry device or a specific passage device, and the detection device for the role actor is also a ball entry device for the role actor or for the role actor It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

[0044] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the second variable entry device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into the second variable ball-in device, so that the prize mode is advantageous for the player.

The specific detection device, the first variable ball entry device, the variable display device, the storage device, and the guidance device constitute a game device group for a first game mode. In particular,
The first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on a left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the special game state by hitting the game area on the left side, and also makes it possible for a beginner to easily understand the game method.

Further, the accessory actuation detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a game device group for a second game mode. In particular, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area formed on the game board surface. In this case, the player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting from the center of the game area to the right half side.

Next, the first variable ball-entering device may include a plurality of variation modes in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different. Specifically, it may include a plurality of fluctuation modes (variation states) in which the duration of the state relatively advantageous to the player is different. For example, the first variable ball-in device operates by detecting a game medium in a specific detection device (becomes a ball-opening advantageous opening state), but by changing the duration of the operation, the first variable ball-in device is changed. The degree of advantage of the variation mode of the ball apparatus becomes relatively different, and the interest in the game is further enhanced for the player by the pleasure of which mode the first variable ball entry apparatus operates.

Further, of the specific display modes (hereinafter, also referred to as first display modes) which are fixedly displayed on the variable display device, these are further special display modes (hereinafter, referred to as second display modes).
And a probability changing means for changing a probability that the first display mode is definitely displayed on the variable display device after the end of the special game state when the final display is performed in the final display mode. can do. In this case, when the final display is made in the second display mode, the probability that the next special game state will occur after the end of the special game state is more advantageous to the player than usual, and a large amount of prizes can be obtained. Can be possible. Therefore, it is possible to give a further game interest to the player by the display mode on the variable display device. Specifically, the specific display mode includes a symbol for changing probability and a symbol for changing non-probability, and the probability changing unit may operate when the symbol is definitely displayed in the symbol for changing probability. it can. On the other hand, when the probability is changed by the probability changing means, the variation mode of the first variable ball entry device can be changed. In this case, for example, when the probability is changed to be relatively higher than usual, if the change mode of the first variable ball entry device is changed to one that is relatively advantageous to the player, the high probability state In, the prize acquisition is more advantageous for the player, so that it may be possible to give the player a high gaming interest.

(Seventh Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable display device that variably displays one or more symbols based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device, and, when the symbols are fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the variable relative to the player. A first variable ball entry device that changes to an advantageous state (including a state in which the first accessory operation device is activated and the first accessory operation port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player); A guiding device capable of guiding the game medium that has entered the 1-variable ball-entering device to either a specific ball-in area or a non-specific ball-in area;
A special game generating device that generates a special game state in which the prize mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area; Based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device for the operation of the accessory, a second variable ball-entering device (the second accessory guidance device is operated, and the second Is changed to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player), and the prize mode is made relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective entry into the second variable entry device. And a possible prize mode increasing device.

In such a gaming machine, the first variable ball-entering device is in an advantageous state for entering the ball based on the specific display mode of the symbol on the variable display device, and the game ball entered into the first variable ball-entering device is identified. A special game state occurs when the ball enters the ball entry area. Here, the game medium is guided to the specific ball entry area by the guidance device, but the guidance device can be guided to either the specific ball entry area or the non-specific ball entry area. The uncertain factor of whether or not the player is guided may make it possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player. That is, in the gaming machine of the present invention,
Whether the game medium enters the specific ball entry area or the non-specific ball entry area depends on the manner in which the game medium enters the first variable entry apparatus or the manner in which the game medium enters the guidance apparatus. It has been. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention can provide a player with a high level of entertainment interest, and thus can improve the operating rate of the gaming machine for a gaming shop. In addition, the starting detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in the starting ball entry device or the starting passage device. It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

[0051] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the first variable ball-in device or the second variable ball-in device. In this case, the identification information on the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into the variable ball-entering device or the like, so that the prize mode is advantageous for the player.

The start detection device, the variable display device, the first variable pitching device, and the guidance device constitute a game device group for a first game mode. In particular, the first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the special game state by hitting the game area on the left side, and also makes it possible for a beginner to easily understand the game method.

Further, the accessory detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a group of gaming devices for the second gaming mode. In particular, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area formed on the game board surface. In this case, the player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting from the center of the game area to the right half side.

The guiding device includes a game medium holding portion capable of temporarily holding the game medium, and the game medium holding portion guides the game medium to the specific ball entry area by rotating the guiding device. It is possible to include a possible first holding portion and a second holding portion capable of guiding to the non-specific ball entry area. In this case, whether the special game state occurs or not is determined depending on whether the game medium is held in the first holding unit or the second holding unit. People will be attracting attention,
Depending on the manner of entering the ball, it may be possible to give a high interest to the player. The guiding device may be constantly rotating during the game, or may be rotating at least when a game medium enters the guiding device. Further, the guidance device may have a different mode of guidance depending on the type or combination of the symbols fixedly displayed on the variable display device. Specifically, the mode of the rotation can be different, for example, the rotation speed can be changed, or the rotation direction can be changed to clockwise or counterclockwise.

[0055] Further, a specific symbol display mode increasing means for increasing the specific display mode of the symbol on the variable display device based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball input area may be provided. In this case, the probability that the specific symbol display mode increasing means will definitely display in the specific display mode increases, and the probability that the first variable ball-entering device becomes a relatively advantageous state increases. It is easy to generate a condition. Therefore, the player may be able to obtain the prize more advantageously. In addition, the specific symbol display mode increasing means may be activated when the final display is performed in the special second specific display mode among the specific display modes (first specific display mode).

Further, the first variable ball-entering device may include a plurality of variation modes in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different. Specifically, it may include a plurality of fluctuation modes (variation states) in which the duration of the state relatively advantageous to the player is different. For example, the first variable ball-in device operates by detecting a game medium in a specific detection device (becomes a ball-opening advantageous opening state), but by changing the duration of the operation, the first variable ball-in device is changed. The degree of advantage of the variation mode of the ball device becomes relatively different, and the first mode is used for the player in any mode.
The pleasure of operating the variable ball-in device further enhances the entertainment interest of the game. In particular, when the specific symbol display mode increasing means operates, the variation mode of the first variable ball entry device can be changed. In this case, for example, when the probability that the symbol is definitely displayed in the specific display mode is changed to be relatively higher than usual, the change mode of the first variable ball entry device is relatively advantageous to the player. If it is changed to a game, in the high probability state, the prize acquisition is more advantageous for the player, so that it may be possible to give the player a high gaming interest.

(Eighth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information related to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A first variable display device for variably displaying one or a plurality of symbols based on detection of a game medium by the detection device, and a player when the symbols are fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the first variable display device. Fluctuating ball entry device that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player (including that the first accessory guidance device operates and the first accessory operation port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player) A second variable display device for variably displaying one or a plurality of symbols based on the ball entry of the game medium into the first variable ball entry device; and temporarily storing the game medium entered into the first variable ball entry device. Storage that can be temporarily stored The device and the stored game media can be guided to either a specific ball entry area or a non-specific ball entry area, and the symbol is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the second variable display device. In the case of, a guidance device for guiding the game medium to the specific ball entry area,
A special game generating device that generates a special game state in which the prize mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area; Based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device for the operation of the accessory, a second variable ball-entering device (the second accessory guidance device is operated, and the second Changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player), and that the prize mode is relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective entry of the game medium into the second variable entry device. And a prize mode increasing device that can perform the prize mode.

In such a gaming machine, a special gaming state is generated based on a specific display mode of symbols on the second variable display device. The trigger of the operation of the second variable display device is based not only on the detection of the game medium by the start detection device but also on the first variable display device which is activated by the detection of the start detection device and changes according to the display mode of the symbol. It is supposed to be based on entering a variable ball entry device. Therefore, the game for operating the second variable display device, which is a trigger for the operation of the special game state, does not become monotonous, and it may be possible to provide a game interest that is not available in a conventional game machine. Further, even when the symbols are fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the second variable display device, the guiding medium guides the game media stored by the storage device to the specific ball-in area to generate a special game state. Due to the configuration, it may be possible to give a high gaming interest to the player depending on the game mode up to the occurrence of the special game state. On the other hand, since it may be possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player, it may be possible for the gaming shop to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. In addition, the starting detection device can be a game medium detection switch provided in the starting ball entry device or the starting passage device. It may be a game medium detection switch provided in the passing device.

One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the first variable ball-entering device or the second variable ball-entering device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into the first variable pitching apparatus or the second variable pitching apparatus, so that the prize mode is advantageous for the player.

The start detecting device, the first variable display device, the first variable ball-in device, the second variable display device, the storage device, and the guidance device are a game for a first game mode. Configure a device group. In particular, the first gaming mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. This makes it easier for the player to obtain the special game state by hitting the game area on the left side, and also makes it possible for a beginner to easily understand the game method.

Further, the accessory actuation detecting device and the second variable ball-in device constitute a game device group for a second game mode. In particular, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area formed on the game board surface. In this case, the player may be able to increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting from the center of the game area to the right half side.

Next, the first variable ball-entering device may include a plurality of variation modes in which the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different. Specifically, it may include a plurality of fluctuation modes (variation states) in which the duration of the state relatively advantageous to the player is different. For example, the first variable ball-entering device operates according to the display mode of the symbol of the first variable display device (becomes a ball-opening advantageous opening state). The degree of advantage of the variable pitching device is relatively different, and the interest in the game is further enhanced by the pleasure of the player in which symbol display mode the first variable pitching device operates.

Further, among the specific display modes (hereinafter, also referred to as a first display mode) which are determined and displayed on the second variable display device, the display is determined in a special display mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a second display mode). When displayed, the second variable display device may include a probability changing unit that changes a probability that the first display mode is definitely displayed after the end of the special game state. In this case, when the final display is made in the second display mode, the probability that the next special game state will occur after the end of the special game state is more advantageous to the player than usual, and a large amount of prizes can be obtained. Can be possible. Therefore, it may be possible to give a further game interest to the player by the display mode on the second variable display device. In addition, when the probability is changed by the probability changing unit, a variation mode of the first variable ball entry device may be changed. In this case, for example, when the probability is changed to be relatively higher than usual, if the change mode of the first variable ball entry device is changed to one that is relatively advantageous to the player, the high probability state In, the prize acquisition is more advantageous for the player, so that it may be possible to give the player a high gaming interest.

(Ninth Mode) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable display device that variably displays one or more symbols based on the detection of the game medium by the detection device, and, when the symbols are fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device, the variable relative to the player. A first variable ball-entering device that changes to an advantageous state (including a case where the first accessory-guiding device is activated and the first accessory-operating port changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player); A second variable ball-in device (a second character object guiding device having a ball region and a non-specific ball-in region) that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the specific detection device. Activates the second role actuation port (Including changing to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player), and the prize mode is more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the entry of the game medium into the specific entry area. A special game generating device that generates a special game state, and a special game generating device that does not generate the special game state, and the prize mode is relatively advantageous to the player based on the entering of the game medium during the normal game state. A first prize mode increasing device, and a second prize mode increasing device in which the prize mode is relatively advantageous to the player during the special game state based on the entering of the game medium. Features.

Such a gaming machine has two game states: a normal state (normal game state) and a special game state. In the normal state (normal game state), by operating the first variable pitching device based on the symbol display, the player can obtain a relatively advantageous state, and furthermore, a specific pitching area in the second variable pitching device. It is assumed that a special game state is established based on the entry of a game medium into the game, and that the player can obtain an advantageous state. Therefore, the player can aim at the start detecting device to obtain a prize such as a score, and the player can aim at the specific ball-entering device to generate a special game state, thereby increasing the prize such as the score. Can be enjoyed. In particular, in the variable display device, if the probability that a specific display mode is fixedly displayed is increased, the rate at which the first variable ball entry device changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player is also increased, so that a prize is obtained. This makes it easier to reduce the player's willingness to play in the normal state (normal game state). Furthermore, in both the normal state (normal game state) and the special game state, the prize mode of the combination can be increased by operating the prize mode increase device, so that the player's willingness to play further increases. on the other hand,
It may be possible for a gaming shop to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine. The start detecting device may be a game medium detecting switch provided on the starting ball-in device or the starting passage device, and the specific detecting device may also be a game medium detecting switch provided in the specific ball-in device or the specific passing device. The switch may be a switch, and the accessory actuation detection device may be a game medium detection switch provided in the accessory actuation ball-in device or the accessory actuation passage device.

[0066] One or more of the identification information may be displayed based on the entry of the game medium into the first variable ball-entering device or the second variable ball-entering device. In this case, the identification information relating to the prize mode of the combination is displayed based on the ball entry into any of the variable ball-entering devices and the like, and the prize mode is advantageous for the player. Further, assuming that the degree of advantage for the player is relatively different between the first variable ball-entering device and the second variable ball-entering device, the operating condition of any variable ball-entering device, that is, the start detection device or Depending on which of the accessory operation detecting devices detects the game medium (that is, whether the game medium passes or enters), it may be possible to give the player a higher level of entertainment.

For example, the first prize mode increasing device adds a further prize to the prize mode generated in the unit game,
The second prize mode increasing device may double a prize mode generated in the unit game. As described above, the advantage degree of the prize mode increasing device is made different between the normal state (normal game mode) and the special game mode. In particular, the prize mode is increased in the special game mode compared with the normal mode (normal game mode). Is large, the player can obtain a larger prize by generating the special game state, and can also obtain a certain prize in the normal state (normal game state). Can be given a high game interest.

The start detecting device, the variable display device, the first variable ball-in device, and the first prize mode increasing device form a first game mode game apparatus group. In addition, the first variable ball entry device can show different variation modes based on the type or combination of symbols that are definitely displayed on the variable display device. Specifically, a pair of movable pieces is provided in the first variable ball-entering device, and the movable piece is in an open state to be in an advantageous state for entering the ball, and the time for which the open state is continued depends on the type of the symbol. Alternatively, it may be relatively different depending on the combination. In this case, it may be possible to give the player a higher level of entertainment interest depending on the form of the symbol to be confirmed and displayed. The first game mode gaming device group may be disposed on the left half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. Thereby, in the normal state (normal game state), it is possible to easily obtain a prize mode if the player hits the game area generally on the left side, and it is possible to allow a game beginner to easily understand the game method. .

Next, the specific ball entry device and the second variable ball entry device constitute a game device group for a second game mode, and the game device group for the second game mode includes the first game mode. The game mode can be configured independently of the gaming device group. That is, by hitting the game device group for the second game mode, the player may be able to actively aim at the occurrence of the special game state. In addition, the gaming device group for the second gaming mode may be provided at a substantially central portion of a gaming area formed on a gaming board surface. In addition, when the first game mode gaming device group is arranged on the left half surface side from the center of the game area, the player can aim and hit the left side from the substantially central portion to win a prize or special through a series of game flows. It may be easier to obtain the occurrence of a gaming state.

Further, the second prize mode increasing device constitutes a third game mode game device, and the third game mode game device can be changed independently of the first game mode game device group. Can be configured. The third gaming mode gaming device may be disposed on the right half surface side from the center of the gaming area formed on the gaming board surface. In this case, the player can increase at least the prize acquired in the special game state by hitting the game area toward the right half surface from the center of the game area.

(Tenth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information related to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, An entry ball detection unit is provided in the entry ball area, and in the unit game, a larger number of game media than the game media fired in the game area or the game media considered to be fired are detected by the ball entry detection unit. In this case, there is provided a ball entry judging means for invalidating the extra ball.

In such a gaming machine, only a limited number of game media in a unit game can be made effective.
In a unit game, it is possible to prevent improper operation such as obtaining a prize by regarding a game medium equal to or more than the upper limit as firing or firing. That is, the unit game can be surely performed with a predetermined number of game media. In addition, the game medium that is considered to be fired or fired in the game area is the game medium that has been fired or fired by the firing device minus the one that returns without reaching the game area (for example, a foul ball). Specifically, for example, (1) from the number detected by the launching ball detection sensor that detects the launched game medium,
A return sensor (for example, a return ball sensor, a foul ball sensor, etc.) that detects a game medium that has returned without reaching the game area.
The number of game media obtained by subtracting the number detected by the above is the number of game media fired in the game area. (2) In a ball feeder for guiding a game medium to a launch position of a launcher,
The number detected by the return sensor (for example, a return ball sensor, a foul ball sensor, etc.) that detects the game medium that has returned without reaching the game area is subtracted from the number detected by the sensor that detects the game medium to be fired. The number of game media
This is the number of game media fired in the game area. (3)
In the launching device, from the number detected by the sensor that detects that the firing hammer for hitting the game medium has come into contact with the game medium and has been energized, the return detecting the game medium that has returned without reaching the game area. Sensors (eg return ball sensors,
The number of game media obtained by subtracting the number detected by the foul ball sensor or the like is the number of game media fired in the game area. In addition, when there is an upper limit to the game media that can be launched into the game area in the unit game, and when the number of game media that is larger than the upper limit is detected by the incoming ball detection means, the excess incoming ball is invalidated. May be provided.

On the other hand, in a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Is provided with an incoming ball detecting means, and the number of game media detected by the incoming ball detecting means in the unit game is different from the number of game media fired in the game area after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of the shooting. In such a case, the apparatus may be provided with an abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality. In addition, when the abnormality determination unit determines that an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality notification unit that notifies the abnormality may be provided. Alternatively, when it is determined that the game medium is abnormal, an abnormality information display means for displaying information relating to a difference between the number of game media detected by the incoming ball detection means and the number of game media fired may be provided. In this case, it is possible to determine an abnormality, for example, when the emitted game medium is caught on an obstacle nail or the like provided in the game area, and the abnormality is notified by the player or the game store where the gaming machine is installed. Can be notified to the clerk or the like. Therefore, it may be possible to quickly notice the abnormality, and it may be possible to quickly deal with the abnormality. It is also possible to provide a game interruption means for stopping the unit game when the abnormality is determined, when the abnormality is determined. Specifically, when it is determined that the abnormality is determined to be abnormal by the abnormality determination unit, it is possible to perform a process of interrupting the launch of the game medium in the launch device. In addition, as such a notifying means, it is possible to notify the abnormality by displaying with a seven-segment LED, a liquid crystal, or the like, or by illuminating with a lamp or the like.

(Eleventh Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Based on the specific ball entry device having a ball entry area and a non-specified ball entry area, and a special ball in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area. A special game generating device for generating a game state, wherein the entering of the game medium into the specific entering area is valid only for a predetermined time after the entry into the specific entering device is detected. It is characterized by the following.

Specifically, for example, the detection of the ball entry detecting means such as a sensor for detecting a ball entry into a specific ball entry area can be enabled only for the above-mentioned predetermined time. In other words, if the detection is always valid, it is possible to generate a special game state by performing an illegal operation on the ball-in detecting means such as the above-described sensor, and it may occur that the prize mode is obtained illegally. ,
In this case, it may be possible to prevent this. Note that, in a gaming machine having a variable display device, entering a game medium into the specific ball entry area is enabled only for a predetermined time after a symbol is definitely displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device. It is also possible. Further, in a gaming machine in which an opening / closing mechanism such as an opening / closing plate is provided in the specific ball entry area, a game medium can enter the specific ball entry area only for a predetermined time after the opening / closing mechanism operates (opens). It is also possible to make the sphere effective. In this way, by setting an effective time for the ball detection of the ball input detecting means for the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area which triggers the operation of the special game generator, the special game generation is illegally performed. It may be possible to prevent illegal games such as operating the device.

When the entry into the specific entry area becomes effective, the entry into the specific entry area becomes invalid after a predetermined number of unit games are completed. . Specifically, when the ball detection of the ball detection means such as the sensor is enabled, the ball detection of the ball detection means is to be continuously enabled for a predetermined number of unit games. Can be. For example, in the case where only the activated unit game is activated for entry, the entry can be invalidated when the activated unit game is completed, and the activated unit game includes the activated unit game. In the case where the entry ball is activated for the predetermined number of unit games, the entry ball can be invalidated when the predetermined number of unit games is completed.
Note that if a ball entry into the specific ball entry area is detected before the unit game of the predetermined number of times ends, it is also possible to invalidate the ball entry at that point. With such a configuration, for example, even when it takes time until the game medium gets caught in the specific ball-entering device and enters the specific ball-in area and is detected, the unit game ends. It is possible to reliably detect the entry of the game medium into the specific entry area.

Further, in a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game, and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, a specific entry area and A special game state in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated based on a specific ball entry device having a non-specific ball entry area and a ball entry of a game medium into the specific ball entry area. A special game generating device that causes the game medium to enter the specific ball entry area becomes effective when the game medium enters the specific ball entry device, and the specific ball entry area or non-specific ball entry area It is also possible to invalidate when a game medium enters the specific ball entry area.

That is, the specific ball-entering device (specific ball-in entrance) is provided with a first ball-in detecting device for detecting the ball entry of the game medium. A second ball entry detection device and a third ball entry detection device for detecting a ball entry of a medium are provided. In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first ball detection device detects a ball, the second ball detection device and the third ball detection device activate the ball, and the second ball detection is performed. Device or third
When a ball entry is detected by the ball entry detection device, the ball entry by the second and third ball entry detection devices becomes invalid.
In this case, even if it takes a long time to enter the specific ball entry area or the non-special ball entry area due to the game medium being caught in the specific ball entry device (specific ball entrance), This is effective, and it may be possible to reliably detect the game medium that has entered the specific ball-entering device in either the specific ball-in area or the non-specific ball-in area.

(Twelfth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of game media into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable ball entry device that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game medium by the object operation detection device (the accessory guiding device is activated, and the accessory operating port is relatively advantageous to the player). And a prize mode increase device that can make the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective ball entry into the variable ball-in device. The prize mode increasing device,
At the end of the unit game in which the prize mode increasing device has started operating, the operation is ended.

For example, in the first unit game in which the prize mode increasing device operates, if the player cannot obtain the prize mode based on the combination, the operation of the prize mode increasing apparatus is changed to the next second unit game. If the prize is acquired in the first unit game, there is little difference in the prize acquisition between the case where the prize mode is acquired and the case where the prize mode is not acquired.
As a plurality of games progress, there may be a case where the player cannot clearly grasp when the acquired prize is at what time. However, according to the above-mentioned gaming machine, the timing of ending the operation of the prize mode increasing device becomes easy for the player to understand, so that the correspondence between the unit game and the acquired award becomes clear, and the player obtains the acquired award (profit). ) Can be reliably grasped. As a result, all players can play a game under the same conditions. In other words, at the end of the unit game, even if the prize mode has not been obtained, the operation is to be ended. Therefore, in the next unit game, the game can always be performed under the same conditions. .

(Thirteenth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, After the operation of the gaming machine provided in the gaming machine is completed, the process proceeds to the next unit game.

According to such a gaming machine, the operation of the gaming machine which has started to operate in the unit game does not operate over the next unit game, and the start timing and the end timing of the unit game become clear. The player can check his or her profit or disadvantage for each unit game.

The following configuration may be used as a trigger for ending a unit game and starting a next unit game. That is, in a gaming machine that displays identification information related to the entry of game media into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game, and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, a predetermined number of game media enter the entry area. After entering the ball area and ending the operation of the gaming device operating in the unit game, it is also possible to proceed to the next unit game. Also in this case, it may be possible to prevent the operation of the specific gaming device from straddling the next unit game. Therefore, the same effect as described above can occur.

(14th aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of game media into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, An accessory guiding device that operates based on the establishment of a condition, and a role operating port that opens and closes in accordance with the operation of the accessory guiding device, wherein the character operating port has a specific ball entry area and a non-specific ball entry And a specific ball entry port (specific ball entry device) having an area, and based on the entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area, the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than the normal state. A special game generating device that generates a special game state is provided, and the specific entrance is provided with an incoming ball detection unit that detects an incoming ball of the game medium,
When the entering ball detecting means detects the entering of the game medium, the entering of the gaming medium into the specific entering area becomes effective, and the entering ball detecting means includes the accessory guidance. It is characterized in that when the device is operating, the incoming ball detection is made effective.

In such a gaming machine, a) establishment of predetermined conditions, b) operation of the accessory guiding device, c) ball detection by means of ball detection at a specific ball entrance, d) specific ball entry area Since the special game generation device operates when all of the series of requirements for ball entry detection by ball entry are satisfied, a special game state is generated even if a partly illegal action is performed on the ball entry detection means etc. It is not possible. That is, in order to perform fraud, it is necessary to satisfy all of the above requirements, and a mechanism that increases the labor of the fraudulent person and makes it difficult for fraud can be achieved. Note that the entry of the game medium into the specific entry area is effective when the entry detection by the entry detection means provided in the specific entry area is effective. The operating condition of the accessory guiding device can be exemplified by a case where a symbol or the like is definitely displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device.

(Fifteenth Mode) A game device is provided, displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game, and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information. A gaming machine that includes a counting means for counting the number of game media that have entered the ball entry area in the unit game, and when the count value of the counting means has reached the upper limit in the unit game, a predetermined time It is assumed that the game proceeds to the next unit game after the lapse of t1, and the operation time t2 from the start to the end of the operation of the gaming machine that operates according to the game mode.
Is set to be shorter than the time t1.

In such a gaming machine, since the operating time t2 of the gaming machine is constant and the operating time t2 is shorter than the time t1 required to proceed to the next unit game, the operation of the gaming machine becomes next. , The start timing and the end timing of the unit game are clear, and the player can confirm his or her own profit or disadvantage for each unit game. In addition, since processing such as extending the time t1 until proceeding to the next unit game by the operation time t2 is not performed, the operation of the gaming machine is increased, which leads to an increase in the profit of the gaming shop where the gaming machine is installed.

The gaming machine that operates in accordance with the above-mentioned game mode can be, for example, an accessory guiding device that operates based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The operating conditions of the accessory guiding device include For example, when the identification information such as a symbol is fixedly displayed in a specific display mode on the variable display device,
For example, a case where a game medium is detected by operation detection means such as an operation gate for operating the accessory guiding device can be exemplified.

(Sixteenth Embodiment) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A special game generating device that generates a special game state in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than a normal state based on the establishment of a condition; A fluctuating ball entry device that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the medium. And a prize mode increasing device that can make the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective ball entry into the variable pitching apparatus. To the variable ball entry device If there is a ball in the game medium, the state changes to a state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. It is characterized in that the time of a normal state is reduced.

[0109] Since the entering of the game medium into the variable ball-in device which triggers the operation of the prize mode increasing device may be only one ball with one game medium, the variable ball-in device with the ball after the ball is advantageous. The state (open state, etc.) is of little value to the player, or in a gaming machine that determines the prize mode by combination, reentering the device (area) once entered reduces the chance of combination. This is disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the advantageous state of the variable ball-in device can be shortened in time, that is, the operating time of the gaming device having little value to the player can be shortened, and disadvantages are given to the player. Can be reduced. In addition, the above-mentioned special game generation device can be operated based on a ball entry of a game medium into a specific ball entry area. Further, the above-described detection device for operating the accessory can be, for example, an operation gate provided with a detection unit, and the detection can be always enabled during the special game state.

(Seventeenth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A special game generating device that generates a special game state in which the prize mode is relatively more advantageous to the player than a normal state based on establishment of a condition; and a game in the accessory detecting device during the special game state. A fluctuating ball entry device that changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player based on the detection of the medium. ), And a prize mode increasing device capable of making the prize mode relatively advantageous to the player based on the effective ball entry into the variable ball-in device, wherein the special game generating device operates. Unit In the technique, when the fluctuation ball entrance device has input balls of game media, wherein the detection of the game media of the won game actuating sensing device in the unit game becomes invalid.

In the same manner as described above, only one game medium needs to be inserted into the variable ball-in device which triggers the operation of the prize mode increasing device. It is provided with an accessory actuation detection device invalidating means for invalidating the detection of the game medium by the accessory actuation detection device for changing the detection of the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of operations of the gaming device (the accessory detecting device) that has little value for the player, and it may be possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player. In this case, also in this case, the special game generation device can be operated based on the ball entry of the game medium into the specific ball entry area. Further, the above-described detection device for operating the accessory can be, for example, an operation gate provided with a detection unit, and the detection can be always enabled during the special game state.

(Eighteenth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of game media into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Game control means for controlling the control of the game device, a launching device for launching the game medium, and a launching ball detection device for detecting the launching medium discharged from the launching device, from the launching ball detection device The detection information is transmitted (input) to the game control means as a pulse signal, and a pulse width increasing means for increasing a pulse width of the pulse signal is provided.

Since the launch of the game medium from the launch device is performed very quickly (the number of launches per unit time is very large, for example, 100 launches can be performed per minute), the detection information detected by the launch sphere detection device is obtained. May not be accurately input to the game control means. For example, when a rising pulse signal is generated based on the detection and the number of shots is counted based on the input of the pulse signal, the pulse width of the generated pulse signal is very small. However,
Even if such a pulse signal with a small pulse width is input to the game control device, there is a case where it is not possible to accurately detect the pulse signal. Therefore, as described above, by providing the pulse width increasing means for increasing the pulse width of the generated pulse signal, it is possible to reliably recognize the detection information, and thus it is possible to accurately count the number of shots. In addition,
The pulse width increasing means can be realized by, for example, providing a multivibrator or the like in an input circuit unit or the like of the game control means.

(Nineteenth Aspect) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A game medium is paid out as a prize mode, and the game medium is paid out when the prize mode is established. If the prize mode increasing device is operated after the payout, the game media corresponding to the increase by the operation of the prize mode increasing device may be paid out at that time. In this case, since the game medium is paid out when the prize mode is established, the payout time is easy for the player to understand, and it is easy to notice an abnormality (ball clogging or the like) of the device related to the payout.

When the prize mode increasing device is operated after the payout, the operation of the prize mode increasing device is performed when the upper limit value of the game media that can be launched into the game area in the unit game is detected by the ball entry detecting means. And pay out the increased amount of game media. In addition, when the operation of the gaming device operable in the unit game is completed, the amount of the game medium increased by the operation of the prize mode increasing device may be paid out. Specifically, a game device (for example, a game device arranged in the game area) that is operating when the upper limit value of the game medium that can be fired in the game area in the unit game is detected by the ball entry detecting means. Payment may be made when the operation is completed. Alternatively, after a lapse of a predetermined time after the upper limit value of the game medium that can be fired in the game area in the unit game is detected by the ball-in detection means, the amount of the game medium increased by the operation of the prize mode increasing device is paid out. can do. In any case, since the payout time of the increase due to the operation of the prize mode increasing device is clarified, it may be possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the payout or the like.

(20th Mode) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, Game control means for controlling the game, a launching device for launching the game medium, and launching status detecting means for detecting the operating status of the launching device, the detection signal from the launching status detecting means is provided The game control means is transmitted (input) to the game control means.

[0098] By transmitting the detection signal from the launch situation detecting means to the game control means, the game control means may be able to determine the situation (operating situation) of the launch device. Examples of the detection signal include a firing device operating signal indicating that the firing device is operating, a non-operation signal indicating that the firing device is not operating, and a firing abnormality signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the firing device. And the like. For example, when the launching device in-operation signal is transmitted, when there is no detection signal from the launching ball detection device for detecting the game medium launched from the launching device (when there is no launching), for example, the launching device is used. May be in a so-called hitting state, so that a notifying unit is provided to notify the player that the game medium for firing is insufficient (there is no game medium on the upper plate). May be possible. Notification means include voice and lamp, liquid crystal, 7
This can be realized by display using a segment LED or the like.

The start of the game means the operation of the drive unit (motor, etc.) of the firing device. Therefore, it may be possible to recognize the start of the unit game by detecting the operation of the driving unit of the firing device. Therefore, for example, by outputting a game start signal based on the operation of the launching device to a test terminal determined by a third party inspection organization that inspects gaming machines, it is possible to reliably grasp the start of a unit game, Inspection by the inspection organization can be facilitated, and the new model can pass the certification in a short period of time, which can contribute to the promotion of practical use.

(Twenty-First Embodiment) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, In the case of a unit game, there is an upper limit on the game medium that can be launched into the game area, and when a game medium having the upper limit value is detected by the ball entry detecting means, after a predetermined time has elapsed after the detection, the next The game progresses to a unit game, and a waiting state notifying means for notifying the player that the player is in a time waiting state during the predetermined time is provided.

In the gaming machine provided with the game confirmation time as described above, the launching device is not operated during the game confirmation time. Therefore, especially for a player who has little experience in playing a game, it may be mistaken as an abnormality (failure) of the launching device. It can be prevented that a mistake (misunderstanding) is caused. In addition, as the waiting state notifying means, a lamp (LE
D) and the like, notification by sound and the like, display notification of characters and figures by a liquid crystal and the like can be exemplified.

(Twenty-second mode) In a gaming machine which displays identification information relating to the entry of a game medium into a plurality of entry areas in a unit game and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the identification information, A variable display device for variably displaying one or a plurality of symbols based on detection of a game medium by the detection device, a firing device for firing the game medium, and counting game media fired from the firing device to a game area; Launch ball counting means for performing, when the game medium is detected in the start detection device, based on the number of shot balls counted by the shooting ball number counting means, the variable display pattern of the symbol in the variable display device And a variable display pattern determining means for determining

For example, when the number of shot balls counted by the shot ball number counting means is large, that is,
If the number of game media is close to the upper limit (for example, two or three times earlier, or half or more than the upper limit), a symbol variation display pattern with a short variable display time is selected. Time efficiency is improved, the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved, and it is possible to contribute to the increase in the sales of the amusement arcade. In addition, since the waiting time before shifting to the next unit game is reduced, the gaming It may be possible to reduce the irritation and stress of the elderly.

The gaming machine of each of the above aspects may include a main control section for controlling the game and a sub-control section which operates based on a command from the main control section. In this way, by controlling the game separately for the main control unit and the sub control unit, it is possible to efficiently perform the game control in the combination ball game machine or the like. Further, the control load on one control unit is reduced as compared with the case where the game control is performed by one control unit. If the main control unit outputs the command at predetermined time intervals, and the sub-control unit selects a control mode within a range assigned by the command and establishes the game control, the main control unit outputs the command. The control burden on the control unit is further reduced.

The main control unit and / or the sub-control unit operates by receiving power supply from a power supply unit, and the power supply unit operates at least when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like. And a backup power supply unit for compensating for RAM data in the unit. In this way, by providing the backup power supply unit in the power supply unit,
Even when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, data relating to the prize mode (for example, prize ball data and score data) is compensated.

Further, the main control section may be provided with information output means capable of outputting information related to the control of the main control section to the outside of the gaming machine. In this case, the state of the gaming machine can be easily grasped outside the gaming machine, and the inspection of the gaming machine by a third party inspection organization or the like can be easily performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period related to the inspection of the gaming machine, and also to reduce the period related to the development of the new gaming machine.

[0107]

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Next, an embodiment as an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. (First Embodiment) First, as a first embodiment, the structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine A as a combination game machine is shown in FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS.

A front structure of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The front part of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A includes a main body frame 2, a middle frame 3,
It comprises a front frame 4, an upper plate 5, a lower plate 6, and a locking device 7. The main body frame 2 is formed by assembling and fixing a wooden plate-like body into a substantially rectangular frame shape. The middle frame 3 is entirely made of plastic, has a frame portion (not shown) and a lower plate portion (not shown), and is fitted and attached to the inner peripheral side of the main body frame 2. Here, the frame portion is moved downward from the upper end to the middle frame 3.
It is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape of about 2/3 of the whole, and has an award ball display LED (not shown) and an award ball display on the left side at the upper end corresponding to the frame decoration lamp lens 4b of the front frame 4. LE
A D-board (not shown) has a stop display LED (not shown) and a stop display LED board (not shown) on the right side.

The lower plate portion occupies approximately 1/3 of the entire middle frame 3 from the lower end to the upper side. On the left end, the lower plate portion is in a gaming state so as to correspond to the speaker surface 5a formed on the upper plate portion 5. A speaker (not shown) for generating a corresponding sound effect is provided, and a game ball stored in the upper plate portion 5 is supplied to a launching device unit 8 (see FIG. 5) that bounces the game ball at substantially the center. A supply device and the like (not shown) are provided. Further, a lower plate 6 is provided below, and a locking device 7 is provided at the center of the right end. The lower plate portion 6 is provided with an ashtray, a ball-pulling lever, and the like, is provided with a discharge port 6a for discharging game balls from the inside of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A, and a firing handle for operating the firing device unit 8 at the right end. 9 are provided. A touch switch 9a for detecting that the player is touching is mounted on the firing handle 9, and a fire stop switch 9b for temporarily instructing a stop of the fire is arranged near the touch switch 9a. The locking device 7 has a band-shaped rectangular parallelepiped with a keyhole, and is used for locking when the front frame 4 is closed.

The front frame 4 is entirely made of plastic and has a substantially arcuate upper side corresponding to the shape of the game area 11 formed on the game board 10 so that the game board 10 can be visually recognized from the front. Has an opening 4a formed in a substantially bullet shape. A substantially rectangular glass frame (not shown) in which a glass plate is fitted according to the opening 4a is mounted on the back surface. The front frame 4 occupies approximately ／ of the entire front surface of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A, and is pivotally mounted on the left end of the middle frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. Further, a frame decoration lamp lens 4b is provided at the upper end.
A frame decoration lamp substrate (not shown) and a plurality of game effect lamps (not shown) are provided inside the lens 4b along an arc at the upper end of the opening 4a.
The upper plate 5 is pivotally attached to the left end of the middle frame 3 below the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. On the outer edge portion 5b of the dish, there are provided buttons for removing balls, buttons for renting / returning game balls, and the like. In addition, a discharge port 5c for discharging game balls from the inside of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A is opened. A speaker surface 5a having a plurality of long holes is formed on the left end, and a volume switch board (not shown) is provided on the back surface. On the left end side of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A, a prepaid card unit 13 is mounted.

Next, the surface structure of the game board 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The game board 10 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, and a back mechanism board 102 described later.
(See FIG. 5), a guide symbol display device (variable display device) is provided in the game area 11 formed in a substantially circular shape by the outer rail 14 and the inner rail 15 provided on the surface thereof.
16, winning symbol combination display device 17, specific ball entrance (specific ball entry device) 18, upper object operation port 19, guidance increase device 2
2. Right gate (accessory detecting device) 21, scoring device 20, lower right entrance 23, 16 consecutive entry device 24, winning symbol display device 25, pair of lamp windmills 26, 27, pair of windmills 28, 29, a large number of obstacle nails 30 and the like are arranged.

Here, the guide symbol display device 16 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 11 and has three 7-segment displays 16a, 16b, 16c and information display LED 31
Are provided. These three 7-segment displays 1
6a, 16b and 16c are arranged side by side in a row, and below the information display LED 31, that is, eight red LEs.
D are arranged in a horizontal line. 7-segment display 1
6a, 16b, 16c are specific entrances (startup detecting device)
When a game ball enters the ball 18, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, A, B, C, D,
The twelve types of guide symbols E and F are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and are sequentially stopped and displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, when such a guide symbol is stopped and displayed with the same symbol, for example, “7, 7, 7”, through a so-called reach display, the upper-gear-piece operation port 19 is opened.

The information display LED 31 is controlled as follows. That is, when the game enters the "chance time" described later, all eight red LEDs are turned on at the same time, and one red LED is turned off every time five points are established regardless of the number of games. The drive control is performed so that all eight red LEDs are turned off by the establishment. In addition, according to this display control mode, the remaining 10 points,
That is, when only two red LEDs are turned on, the sound is switched from the previous one, for example, to a fast tempo, so that the effect to further enhance the interest of the player is produced. ing. In addition, when the "chance time" described later is not entered and special game rights are not being generated, shift lighting control is performed simultaneously from the red LEDs on both left and right ends toward the center, and then the shift lights are simultaneously shifted toward the left and right ends. The control is performed to control the so-called reach notice and the reliability increase display of the guide symbol. Further, during the occurrence of a special game right described later, 1
In order to display a so-called round of four games, first, two red LEDs on the right side as viewed from the front are turned on in advance, and each time one round is completed, the lighting control is sequentially performed from the adjacent red LED. Let's make all 8 red LE
After D is turned on, control is performed to sequentially turn off the red LED at the right end to notify the player of the current round.

The 16-ball input device 24 is arranged at the lowermost edge of the game area 11, and the inside thereof is divided into 16 horizontal rows, and 16 input ports 24a are provided. Each entrance 24
A is provided with a ball entry switch 24s, and can detect a game ball entered. In addition, 16 consecutive entry ball devices 2
A winning symbol display device 25 is provided below 4.
Corresponding to each of the 16 entrances 24a, eight kinds of numeral patterns such as 1,1,2,2,3,3, ~ 8,8 are arranged in parallel from the front left and in the order of red and green. Two are drawn consecutively. A red lamp 25a is arranged on the left red numeral design, and a green lamp 25b is arranged on the right green numeral design, which is behind each of the numeral designs and is arranged on the left among the same numerals arranged in parallel. When a game ball enters any one of the entrances 24a, a red lamp 25a or a green lamp 25b corresponding to a numeral pattern corresponding to the ball.
Lights up. By arranging such numeric symbols, the decorativeness of the winning symbol display device 25 is improved, and the appearance is improved. Hereinafter, 16 consecutive ball-in devices 24
When it is necessary to distinguish each of the entrances 24a, the number and the color are used, for example, the first red entrance 24a (first from the left, “1 red” of the winning symbol display device 25) ), The first green entrance 24a (second from the left, corresponding to “1 green” of the winning symbol display device 25).

At the lower center of the winning symbol display device 25, a chance time display portion 25c and a score display portion 25d, each composed of one 7-segment display, are arranged in parallel. Chance time display section 25c on the left
Indicates that the current game has entered the "chance time" described later by "C" or, if a special game right described later is being generated, is displayed by "H". Inform the player of the current game state, and usually simply display a number pattern or the like in a fluctuating manner. The score display section 25d on the right side displays a score to be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied during one game, which will be described later. In addition,
If the score is 10 or more, "F" is displayed.

The winning symbol combination display device 17 is provided immediately below the guiding symbol display device 16 and is a frame-shaped plastic substrate having a substantially square shape and an eave for preventing balls on the upper portion. Seven-segment displays are arranged in a matrix of cells. Then, eight types of numeric symbols 1 to 8 are displayed in red or green on the 7-segment display of each cell. Therefore, in consideration of the color difference between red and green, 16 types of numeric symbols are displayed. Also, each numerical symbol of different colors displayed on the 7-segment display of each square corresponds to each red numeric symbol or each green numeric symbol in the winning symbol display device 25, and is transmitted to each entrance 24a or the like. Winning symbol display device 2 by entering the game ball
The respective red lamps 25a or the respective green lamps 25b of 5 are turned on, and the corresponding numeric symbols displayed on the 7-segment display of each cell are blinked. Further, when the blinking numeric symbols are aligned vertically and horizontally, the respective numeric symbols are alternately blinking in the original red or green and orange colors. Since the drive control is performed in this manner, the decorativeness of the winning symbol combination display device 17 is enhanced and the appearance is improved as compared with the related art.

Each of the numerical symbols displayed on the 7-segment display of each cell indicates that a so-called interval time (game confirmation time: for example, 5 seconds) elapses between the immediately preceding game and the next game after the end of one game. Later, when the score is established, when the main control unit 140 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal of the prize ball payout to the frame control unit 180 (see FIG. 6), or when the score is not established. After the interval time (game confirmation time) elapses, the lights are turned off all at once, and new numeric symbols related to the next game are turned on. In addition, just before the normal time when the above-mentioned new numerical symbols (see FIGS. 12 to 13) are illuminated and displayed, the character “CHOICE” is replaced with the numeric symbols ( Immediately before illuminated display (see FIG. 14), “CH
The character “GO GO” is lit and displayed immediately before the character “ANCE” is lit and displayed with each numeric symbol of “CHANCE TIME” (see FIG. 19).

In addition, one of the special game rights, which will be described later, is generated.
During the four game rounds, immediately before each numeric symbol related to each round is lighted and displayed, the remaining seven-segment display with 16 squares is used for the remaining 13 games, for example. Is “3”, “2” for the remaining 12 games, “1” for the remaining 11 games, “0” for the remaining 10 games, and 9 for the remaining 10 games.
“9” is displayed for a game, “2” is displayed for two remaining games, and “1” is displayed for one remaining game.

The specific entrance 18 is provided with the guide symbol display device 16.
A specific entrance detecting switch (starting detecting device) 18s is provided inside the starting opening. As described above, the 7-segment displays 16a, 16b, 1
6c is displayed in a variable manner, and the game ball is passed through a guiding gutter 52 disposed on the back side of the game board 10 to be described later, for example, the 6th red ball entrance 24 of the 16 consecutive ball entry device 24.
Entered a. Subsequently, the red light 25a of the winning symbol display device 25 is passed by passing through the ball entry switch 24s.
Is turned on, and 7 of the winning symbol combination display device 17 is displayed.
No. 6 red, which is the corresponding numeric symbol displayed on the segment display, blinks.

The upper part operation port 19 is provided with the guide symbol display device 1.
6 is a so-called tulip-type mechanical accessory, which is a mechanism in which a pair of movable pieces are opened and closed in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Usually, the pair of movable pieces are in a closed shape, and a so-called triangular nail is arranged in a region immediately above the operating port, which makes it difficult to enter a game ball. However, each 7-segment display 16 in the guide symbol display device 16
When a, 16b, and 16c are stopped and displayed, for example, in the same pattern of "7, 7, 7", the pair of movable pieces are opened to the left and right so that the game ball can enter the operating port. Move to When only one game ball enters, the ball is detected by a ball detection device provided therein, and the ball is immediately closed mechanically based on the detection. When there is no game ball, the operating port is kept open for a maximum of three games including the game until there is a game ball. It is closed after the end of the operation (carryover mechanism). Further, the game ball that has entered the upper part operation port 19 reaches the guidance increasing device 22 via the guidance gutter 50 provided on the back side of the game board 10. A pair of lamp windmills 2
The reference numerals 6 and 27 are symmetrically arranged on the left and right sides of the upper part operation port 19. Further, the pair of windmills 28 and 29 are also symmetrically arranged on both the left and right sides of the winning symbol combination display device 17.

The guidance increasing device 22 is disposed on the left side of the specific ball entrance 18 and has a clune 22a in which a guidance increasing device operating region 22x and regions 22y and 22z outside the operating region are formed.
And a right generation port 22b. Kroon 2
2a is concave and has three holes formed at the bottom thereof. As shown in the plan view of FIG. 2 (b), one hole closest to the player as viewed from the player is located in the guidance increasing device operating area (specification). Ball entry area)
22x, and the two holes on the far side are regions outside the operation region (non-specific ball entry regions) 22y and 22z. Right generation port 22b
Is located at the entrance of the ball just below the operation area 22x of the guidance increasing device of the clune 22a, and has a V switch 22s inside.
Is arranged. And this guidance increase device operation area 2
The game ball enters only when passing 2x. The game ball that has passed through the V switch 22s enters, for example, the first red ball entrance 24a of the 16-ball system 24 via a guide gutter 51 provided on the back side of the game board 10 described later. When the player hits the ball and passes through the ball entry switch 24s, the red lamp 25a of the winning symbol display device 25 is turned on. Further, the first numeral, which is the corresponding numeral symbol displayed on the 7-segment display of the winning symbol combination display device 17, blinks.

It should be noted that the region 2 outside the operating region of the crane 22a
The game ball that has passed through either 2y or 22z passes through a guiding gutter 52 disposed on the back side of the game board 10 described later,
For example, a green ball 25b of the winning symbol display device 25 is turned on by entering a first green entrance 24a of the 16 consecutive entry device 24 and passing the entry switch 24s. In addition, the first green, which is the corresponding numeric symbol displayed on the 7-segment display of the winning symbol combination display device 17, is blinkingly displayed.

As described above, the game ball that has entered the upper object operating port 19 passes through the guide gutter 50, appears immediately above the clune 22a, and falls naturally, and falls into the concave croon 22a.
Flows down spirally along the inner circumference of any area
(Hole). Then, when the vehicle enters the guidance increasing device operation area 22x, the ball subsequently enters the right generation port 22b and passes through the V switch 22s, so that the guidance increasing device 22 is activated and a special game right is generated. "Is transferred to the special game state. This special game will be described later. The right gate 21 is arranged on the right side of the guide symbol display device 16, and a passage switch (detection device for actor operation) 21s is arranged inside the passage opening. In addition, an arc-shaped direction changing member is formed immediately below the passage opening in order to force the passing game ball to flow rightward. As mentioned above,
When a game ball passes through the right gate 21 after the special game right is generated, the score increasing device (variable ball-entering device) 20 operates.

The lower right ball entrance 23 is located below the right gate 21 and just above the center of the score increasing device 20. The game ball that has entered the lower right entrance 23 passes through, for example, a guiding gutter 54 disposed on the back side of the game board 10 described below, and receives, for example, the seventh red ball of the 16-continuous ball device 24. Ball mouth 24
When the player enters the ball a and passes the ball switch 24s, the red lamp 25a of the winning symbol display device 25 is turned on. Further, the corresponding numeral symbol, which is displayed on the 7-segment display of the winning symbol combination display device 17, is flashing in red.

The score increasing device (variable ball input device) 20 is disposed on the right side of the windmill 29 and directly below the lower right ball input port 23, and is a so-called tulip-type electric accessory. The movable piece is configured to be opened and closed in the left-right direction. Normally, the pair of movable pieces are in a closed shape, and the lower right entrance port 23 is disposed in the region immediately above the operation port, so that it is difficult to enter a game ball. However, as described above, when a special game right is generated and the game ball passes through the right gate 21, the pair of movable pieces open left and right, and the game ball can enter the operating port of the score increasing device 20. Transition to the state. A ball entry switch 20s is arranged inside the working port. Then, when the game ball enters the score increasing device 20, for example, the 5th red, 5th, 5th,
Assuming that the ball has entered the green, sixth, and seventh green entrances 24a, the red lamp 25a or each green lamp 25b of the winning symbol display device 25 is turned on, and the winning symbol combination display device 17 is turned on. The corresponding numeric symbol displayed on the 7-segment display blinks. Then, the game ball that has entered the score increasing device 20 is a game board 10 described later.
Via the guide gutter 55 disposed on the back side of
The ball is entered into the seventh green entrance 24a of the 16 consecutive entry system 24 and passes through the entry switch 24s. Note that the score increasing device 2
The score achieved in one game is doubled by entering 0.

The obstacle nails 30 are erected so as to correspond to the arrangement of the respective devices in the game area 11 and to enhance the interest of the player as appropriate. Of the nails, in the case of the present embodiment, the winning symbol display device 2
The second red, the third red, the fourth red, the fifth green,
Above each of the 6th green and 7th green entrance openings 24a, the nail arrangement is formed such that it is usually difficult to enter the ball. Above each of the second green, fourth green, fifth red, and seventh red entrances 24a, the entrance 24a is provided.
Rather, the nail arrangement is formed relatively easily. On the other hand, the nail arrangement above the other entrance 24a is, for example,
The third green and sixth red entrances 24a are usually easily formed. It should be noted that the nail placement for the entrance that is difficult to enter is difficult compared to the entrance that is easy to enter, but is set with a gap that allows the possibility of entering the ball to be obtained appropriately.

[0127] The back ball preventing member 34 is provided at the lower center of the 16-ball unit 24, and prevents a game ball that has returned without reaching the game area 11 from returning to the firing position again. A back ball detection sensor 34s is disposed below and below the back ball prevention member 34 (see FIG. 3). The sensor 34s is for detecting the number of back balls. The anti-foul ball member 32 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 15, and the return rubber 33 is attached to the anti-foul member 3.
The position of the right half of the game board 10 is substantially opposite to the position 2 and is fitted along the outer rail 14.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, between the launch hammer 8a of the launch unit 8 and the back ball prevention member 34, a launch ball detection sensor 8s, which is an optical sensor, is provided to detect the number of launch balls. are doing. That is, in the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A, since the number of game balls that can be fired in one game is limited (for example, 16), this fire ball detection sensor 8
The output from the s and the output from the back sphere detection sensor 34s are intended to accurately count the number of valid game balls fired. Then, a part of the side wall of the launch path of the game ball from the launch hammer 8a (a part of the outer rail 14 or the like).
Is formed by a transparent member 35 so that the arrangement of the shooting sphere detection sensor 8s can be confirmed from the front when the upper plate 5 is opened. The back ball detection sensor 34s can also be easily confirmed from the front when the upper plate 5 is opened. The arrangement of the detection sensors is arbitrary, and the number of detection sensors is arbitrary as long as the number of effective launch balls can be accurately counted.

Next, the arrangement of the ball path and the like on the back side of the game board 10 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Gaming board 1
In the upper part of the center of the back surface of the upper part 0, there is provided a through hole 40 for the upper part actuation port.
Is formed, and a penetrating hole 42 for mounting a winning symbol combination display device is provided immediately below. Further, a specific entrance opening 43 is provided diagonally below and to the right of the guide symbol display device mounting through hole 41, and a guide increasing device through hole 44 is provided on the right side thereof in the vertical direction. It is divided and formed. On the other hand, on the left side of the piercing hole 42 for mounting the winning symbol combination display device, a lower right entrance hole piercing hole 45 and a score increasing device piercing hole 4 are provided.
6 are provided. Further, through holes 47 are provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 10 so as to correspond to the sixteen entrances 24a of the sixteen consecutive entry devices 24, respectively. Further, there are provided through holes 48, 48 for mounting a lamp windmill at symmetrical positions on the left and right sides of the upper member operation port through hole 40, and a right gate just above the lower right entrance ball through hole 45. A mounting through hole 49 is provided.

Next, a description will be given of the ball path. Each of the through holes is connected by a gutter. A guiding gutter 50 is provided between the upper portions, and the guiding increasing device penetration hole 44 is provided.
16 consecutive ball entry device 2 from the lower part (behind the right generation port 22b)
A guiding gutter 51 is disposed in the through hole 47 corresponding to the No. 4 red ball entrance 24a, and a central portion of the guiding increasing device through hole 44.
(Back side of the outside region 22y, 22z of the operation area of the crown 22a)
A guide gutter 52 is provided in a through hole 47 corresponding to the first green ball entrance 24a of the 16-ball system 24. In addition, from the specific entrance opening 43, 6 of the 16 continuous entry devices 24
The guiding gutter 5 is inserted into the penetration hole 47 corresponding to the red ball entrance 24a.
A guiding gutter 54 is provided from the lower right entrance opening 45 to the penetration hole 47 corresponding to the 7th red entrance 24a of the 16 consecutive entry device 24. Furthermore, the 7th green ball entrance 2 of the 16 consecutive ball entrance device 24 from the score increasing device penetrating hole 46
A guide gutter 55 is provided in the through hole 47 corresponding to 4a. In addition, in each through hole 47 corresponding to each of the ball entrances 24a of the 16 consecutive ball entry device 24, a set for guiding all the game balls that have entered the respective ball entrances 24a to the outside of the arranged ball type pachinko machine A. The gutter 56 is connected. A solenoid 60 for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces of the score increasing device 20 right and left is disposed near the score increasing device through hole 46.

Next, the back surface structure of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Body frame 2
Are supported by a pair of hinges 101 provided at the upper and lower ends of the front frame 4 in the middle frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The mechanism board 102 is supported by a pair of hinges 103 provided at the upper and lower ends of the mechanism board 102 in the middle frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 10 is detachably attached to the front side of the middle frame 3. On the left side when viewed from the arrangement position of the hinge 101 on the upper end side, the prize ball tank 10 provided with the tank ball out detection switch 104 at the tank bottom.
5 and a tank rail 106 connected to the prize ball tank 105 are attached. In addition, tank rail 1
A ball release lever 107 is provided at the right end of 06, a supply ball out detection switch 108 is provided downstream thereof, and a prize ball payout device 109 is provided downstream thereof.

Subsequently, a game ball distribution unit 110 is provided downstream of the prize ball payout device 109. On the lower side of the tank rail 106, a guide symbol display device 16, a winning symbol combination display device 17, and a symbol control unit 150 described later.
A back case 111 with a lid that stores a symbol control board (not shown) that is a main control board 140 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, is a main control board 140 (see FIG. 6). Main control board cases 112 each storing (not shown) are provided. On the left side of the main control board case 112, a launcher board case 1 storing a launcher board (not shown)
13 and a launch collective relay board 116 are provided. In the lower left part of the mechanical panel 102, the above-described firing device unit 8 is also provided.
A frame control board case 1 storing a frame control board (not shown) which is a frame control unit 180 (see FIG. 6) provided with a frame state display 117 for displaying a prize ball motor abnormality or the like with a 7-segment LED.
18 are provided. Also, a decoration control board (not shown) storing a decoration control unit 160 (see FIG. 6) for controlling display of lamps and LEDs, and a sound control unit 170 (see FIG. 6) for controlling sound and sound effects are stored. A sound control board (not shown) is also provided.

On the other hand, at the upper right end of the mechanical panel 102, there are a fuse box 119, a power switch 120, a power terminal board 121, and a gaming machine such as a jackpot, launcher control, ball out, door opening, award ball, ball lending, etc. A terminal board 122 provided with a frame external connection terminal is provided. A power cable 123 for receiving power supply from outside is also provided below the terminal board 122. A connection cable 124 extends upward from a frame control board case 118 in which the frame control board is stored, and is connected to the prepaid card unit 13 having a power cable 125. Also, mechanical panel 1
A ball passage member 126 for a lower plate portion is provided at a substantially central lower end portion of 02.

Next, a control system and the like of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine A will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, only the control related to the game control will be performed, and the prize ball control and the like are the same as the known control, and a description thereof will be omitted. The electronic control unit 130 starts and ends the game, fires game balls, calculates the number of effective fired balls, stops changing the guide symbol, displays the number symbols in the ball, displays the combination of the number symbols, special game, and calculates the winning score. , And controls various operations over the entire game, such as payout of prize balls. This includes a main control unit 140, a symbol control unit 150, a decoration control unit 160, a voice control unit 170, a frame and other control units 18
0 (mainly related to prize balls and the like).

Here, the main control unit 140 includes the CPU 141 and the R
AM 142, ROM 143, input / output port 144, bus 14
5 to form a logic operation circuit. And, on the input side of the input / output port 144,
The specific entrance detecting switch 18s of the specific entrance 18 and the V switch 22 of the guidance increasing device 22 via the relay board 200
s, passage switch 21s of right gate 21, 16 entry switches 24s of 16 continuous entry devices 24, score increasing device 20
Are connected to each other. The output side of the input / output port 144 is connected to a symbol control unit 150, a decoration control unit 160, a voice control unit 170, a frame and other control units 180, and the like. The symbol control unit 150 is, like the main control unit 140, the CPU 1
51, a RAM 152, a ROM 153, and an input / output port 154 are mutually connected by a bus 155 to constitute a logical operation circuit. On the output side of the input / output port 154, the guide symbol display device 16, the winning symbol combination display device 1
7, chance time display section 25c, score display section 25d,
Other devices (not shown) are connected to each other. On the output side, the decoration control unit 160 controls the red lamp 25a or the green lamp 25b of the winning symbol display device 25, the information display LED3.
1 and the like are respectively connected. The voice control unit 170
A speaker or the like (not shown) is connected on the output side. Although not shown, the decoration control unit 160 and the voice control unit 170 also have a CPU, a RA, and the like, similar to the main control unit 140.
The M, ROM, and input / output ports are interconnected by a bus to form a logical operation circuit.

The main controller 140 of this embodiment performs various control processes according to the main routine shown in the flowchart of FIG. First, decoration processing (S100)
Then, the main control unit 140 transmits a command to the decoration control unit 160 that controls the drive of the decoration components such as the lamps and the LEDs installed on the game board 10, and transmits the command to the decoration control unit 160.
In the subsequent random number processing (S200), the main control unit 140 controls the symbol control unit 150 to control the 16 types of different colors displayed on the 7-segment display of each square of the winning symbol combination display device 17. An update process is performed on a random number for selection (which will be described in detail later) of a sequence of numeric symbols (hereinafter, referred to as a “table”) and a random number for judging success or failure.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8, in the random number updating routine executed as a subroutine of this random number processing, the CPU 1
41 is 0 to 1 provided in the setting area of the RAM 142
The value of the table selection random number Rd2 of the random number counter C2 that repeatedly counts 2 in ascending order is incremented by 1 (S
201) Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the incremented table selection random number Rd2 is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “12”) (S202). Here, if an affirmative determination is made that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (S202: YES), a process of returning the value of the table selection random number Rd2 to “0” is performed (S20).
3) After that, or when a negative determination is made that the value of the table selection random number Rd2 is less than the predetermined value (S202: NO), the return processing ends. By executing this random number update routine, the value of the table selection random number Rd2 repeats, for example, 13 kinds of integer values from 0 to 12.
The value of the table selection random number Rd2 is cleared to 0 in an initial state such as when the power is turned on. Further, the random number counter C2 counts a value of 0 to 12, but may divide the value into two types, a value of 0 to 9 and a value of 0 to 2, and count them individually by the counter.

Also, at the time of base correction described later, 0 to 7
The above update process is performed using the value of the table selection random number Rd3 of another random number counter C3 which repeatedly counts the integer values of the above in ascending order. In addition, during the generation of the special game right described later, the above update process is performed using the value of the table selection random number Rd4 of the other random number counter C4 that repeatedly counts the integer values of 0 to 3 in ascending order. Is Further, at the time of the "chance time" described later, the update processing as described above is performed using the value of the table selection random number Rd5 of the other random number counter C5 which repeatedly counts the integer values of 0 to 3 in ascending order. Is The process of updating the random number for determining whether or not the answer is the same as the random number updating routine. That is, for example, the updating process is performed using the value of the random number Rd1 for determining the success or failure of the random number counter C1 that repeatedly counts 0 to 299 in ascending order. However, random number Rd
The judgment value (that is, the upper limit) of whether to return the value of 1 to “0” is a numerical value (for example, “29
9 ").

In the data creation processing (S300), the main control unit 140 controls the symbol control unit 150, the frame and other control units 18
Data to be output to each control unit such as 0 is created and written to an output register. Switch read processing (S
400), the main control unit 140 determines that the specific entrance detection switch 18s, the V switch 22s, the passing switch 21s,
Processing for reading input signals from switches and sensors such as the six ball entry switches 24s, the ball entry detection switch 20s, and the shot ball detection sensor 8s is performed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9, in this switch reading process, a winning symbol display routine is executed as one of the subroutines. In the winning symbol display routine, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 scans the V switch 22s, the 16 ball entry switches 24s, and the ball entry detection switch 20s (S401). The corresponding symbol pattern red lamp 25a or green lamp 25b is turned on by the winning symbol display device 25 via the unit, and the 7 segments of each square of the winning symbol combination display device 17 corresponding thereto via the symbol control unit 150. The red numeric symbol or the green numeric symbol displayed on the display is blinked (S402).
In addition, in response to the ball entry signal from the ball entry switch 24s, one corresponding numeric symbol corresponding to the ball entry port 24a is displayed blinking, but when there is a ball entry signal from the ball entry detection switch 20s. , A plurality of corresponding numeric symbols blink.
Further, if the display is already blinking, the blinking display is maintained as it is.

At S500, error processing is performed, and at S60
At 0, three 7-segment displays 16a, 16b, 16 of the guide symbol display device 16 controlled by the symbol control unit 150
The guide symbol changing process for each guide symbol in c is performed. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific entrance 18 (when a start signal is input from the specific entrance detection switch 18s), the main control unit 140 sends the symbol control unit 1
A command is transmitted to 50 and the guide symbol display device 1
In each of the 7-segment displays 16a, 16b, and 16c, a guide symbol (for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, A,
(12 types of B, C, D, E, and F) are displayed one after another, and are stopped and displayed one after another to determine them. Which of the guide symbols is to be stopped and displayed depends on the result of the win / fail determination and the symbol determination executed in the next special game process of S700.

In S700 (special game processing), in the switch reading processing (S400), the specific entrance detection switch 18
s, the main control unit 140
From the RAM 142 of the random number counter C1
d1 is read, and it is determined whether or not the value matches the hit value. In the case of the present embodiment, a random number Rd1 for determining whether or not the information is correct.
Are 300 kinds of integer values from 0 to 299, and "11" is set as a hit value, and a low probability (1/300 in the present embodiment) of a low hit probability or "1" as a hit value.
1 "," 12 "," 13 "," 14 "," 15 "," 1 "
6 "is set and one of the high probabilities (1/50 in the present embodiment) having a high hit probability is performed. Initially, the probability is low, but thereafter, according to the progress of the game, a probability improvement routine (FIG. 20)
Reference). Then, each of the determination commands of “hit” and “miss”, a command for determining a symbol indicating the hit (the same symbol), a mode command such as a reach mode related to the hit, a mode command relating to a so-called hit reach, and the same indicating a miss are not the same. A symbol confirmation command, a symbol stop timing command, and the like are transmitted to the symbol control unit 150. Upon receiving these commands, the symbol control unit 150 stops and displays the determined symbol at the determined stop timing after the above-described variable display and determines the symbol.

In this embodiment, the random number counter C1 reads the random number Rd1 for judging the success or failure when the game ball enters the specific entrance 18 (a start signal from the specific entrance detection switch 18s is input). Is performed), but may be performed at another timing. As another example of the timing of reading the random number Rd1 for determining whether or not it is valid, the guidance symbol display device 16
, When the set time has elapsed from the effective launch of the game ball, at the start of the game (for example, when the first effective launch or entry of the first ball is detected), at the end of the game ( For example, when the effective launch or entry of the 16th ball is detected), at the end of the set number of games, at the end of the set number of games, and when the next game is started, various other timings can be considered. .

As described above, when the guide symbol stopped and displayed is the same, the upper-gear operating port 19 is opened, and the game ball entering the opened upper-gear operating port 19 is guided by the guiding gutter 50 ( (See FIG. 4) to the guidance increasing device 22. Then, it passes through the guidance increasing device operation area 22x through the clune 22a of the guidance increasing device 22 and passes through the right generation port 22.
When entering ball b (detected by V switch 22s)
The guidance increasing device 22 is activated to generate a special game right and to enter a special game state. That is, including the one game, 14
A round of the game takes place. During the generation of the special game right, when a passing signal is input from the passing switch 21 s provided in the right gate 21, the score increasing device 20 is opened (this opening is executed in the solenoid processing of S900). ). By opening the score increasing device 20, a high score can be easily obtained.

When an incoming ball signal is input from the incoming ball detection switch 20s provided in the score increasing device 20, or when the opening time thereof reaches, for example, 5.5 seconds, the score increasing device 20 is activated. Will be closed. During the generation of the special game right, the opening of the score increasing device 20 is repeatedly performed. Further, during the generation of the special game right, the table displayed on the 7-segment display of each square of the winning symbol combination display device 17 is constituted only by a table which easily obtains a high score, as described later. In the special game, the round of 14 games is completed after the special game right is generated, or the game ball passes through the guidance increasing device operation area 22x of the crune 22a of the guidance increasing device 22 during the special game, and the right is generated. Mouth 22b
And the detection is detected by the V switch 22s, the processing ends even before the end of the round of 14 games. Further, the fact that the special game is currently being performed is displayed on the 7-segment display of the chance time display section 25c arranged at the lower center of the winning symbol display device 25 via the symbol control section 150, with the symbol "H" displayed. The player is notified to that effect. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guidance-increasing-device operating area 22y, 22z, the guidance-increasing device 22 does not operate and no special game right is generated. Therefore, no special game is executed.

In S800 (score calculation processing), the main control unit 1
40 determines whether or not one game has been completed, and if one game has been completed, executes a score calculation routine as a subroutine, and sets a frame or other control unit in accordance with the score calculated by the score calculation routine. Payout of a prize ball or the like is performed by 180, each numerical symbol displayed on the 7-segment display of each square in the winning symbol combination display device 17 is turned off by the symbol control unit 150, and the winning symbol display device is displayed by the decoration control unit 160. 25 red lamps 25a and green lamps 25
The processing associated with the end of the game, such as turning off the light b, is executed.
Note that the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 functions as a hit determination unit in executing the hit determination described above, and functions as a special game execution unit in executing a special game when a special game right is generated.

Next, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, in the score calculation routine, the winning symbol combination display device 1
7 is a numerical pattern of 4 squares in a column or a row displayed on each 7-segment display, a numerical pattern of 4 squares in the center (hereinafter, referred to as a "square pattern"), and a central figure in the lowest row.
It is determined whether or not the numerical symbol of the cell (hereinafter, referred to as “base symbol”) is alternately blinking red or green and orange (S801, S803, S805). S80
If an affirmative determination is made in step 1, processing is performed to add the score T by one for each of the columns (S802). For example, if the number of columns in which four numeric symbols in a column or a row are arranged in a line and red or green and orange alternately blink is two, the score T is +2, and if there are five columns, If you do +5. Also, S
If a positive determination is made in 805, the score T is incremented by one (S80).
6). If an affirmative determination is made in S803, a process of adding 3 to the score T is performed (S804). In the present embodiment, the maximum score in one game is set to 10 points, and a limit process is executed in which no more points are added. Further, as described above, the achieved score is obtained through the symbol control unit 150, the score display unit 25d arranged at the lower center of the winning symbol display device 25.
Will be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 6, in S900, a process for controlling the solenoid for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces of the score increasing device 20 is performed, and the remaining time process (S1) is performed.
000) and waits for the elapse of a set time (for example, 2.048 ms) from the start of the main routine while performing non-constant-speed random number processing or the like. After the elapse of the set time, the main routine is executed again.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control unit 14 is periodically repeated by a method such as a hardware interrupt.
0 executes subroutines of table selection, chance time processing, probability improvement, and base correction processing described below. In the table selection routine, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, first, it is determined whether one game is over (S51). That is, in the arrangement ball-type pachinko machine A, for example, one game is established when all 16 game balls are effectively fired in the game area 11, so in the case of the present embodiment, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 ,
The number of game balls detected by the ball entry switch 24s is 16
If the number has reached, it is determined that one game is over. In addition to this, it is possible to employ various general determination techniques such as the lapse of time from the effective launch of the 16th game ball.

Here, when an affirmative judgment is made that one game is over (S51: YES), the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140
Determines whether a special game right is being generated (S52).
If a negative determination is made that the special game right has not been generated (S52: NO), the random number for table selection of the random number counter C2
One of the table values corresponding to each table selection random number Rd2 is read from Rd2 (S53). In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, when the value of the table selection random number Rd2 of the random number counter C2 is "0", the value of "1" in Table 1 is "1". , The value of “2” in Table 2 is read, and in the case of “−12”, the value of “13” in Table 13 is read. The tables 1 to 13 in which the number of columns is 4 and the number of rows are 4 correspond to the winning symbol combination display device 17 composed of a 7-segment display in a 4 × 4 matrix, and each numeral shown in the table of the drawing. Indicates a numeric symbol displayed on the 7-segment display of each square of the winning symbol combination display device 17 as it is. Note that, as described above, since each numeral symbol is displayed in either red or green, it is assumed that the circled numerals correspond to red and the other numerals correspond to green in the drawings. Further, as an example, the tables 1 to 10 have a configuration in which it is relatively difficult to achieve a score.
No. 3 is configured to easily enter a “chance time” described later.

Subsequently, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 transmits a command to the symbol control unit 150, and the symbol control unit 150 converts the arrangement of the numeric symbols corresponding to the values of the table read in S53 into the winning symbol combination. Display device 17
Is lit on the 7-segment display of each cell (S5).
5). However, the lighting display is performed at the same time as the start of one game, that is, after the elapse of an interval time set between one game already ended and the next game started, or
This is executed after a payout command such as a prize ball accompanying the establishment of the score of the immediately preceding game is transmitted to the frame control unit. In addition, the timing of this lighting display, regardless of the above,
It may be executed when the first game ball of the next game is detected by the shooting ball detection sensor 8s. The turning on or off of the arrangement of the number symbols of the immediately preceding game or the blinking display is performed immediately before the lighting of the arrangement of the new number symbols of one game to be started next. Various timings may be considered. For example, the timing may be after all 16 game balls have been detected by the ball entry switch 24 s of the ball entrance 24 a of the 16 consecutive ball entry device 24.

On the other hand, when the affirmative judgment is made that the special game right is being generated (S52: YES), the values “0”, “1”, “2” of the table selection random number Rd4 of the random number counter C4 are set.
From “3”, one of the values of tables “1” to “4” corresponding to each table selection random number Rd4 is read (S5).
4). Tables 1 to 4 as an example shown in FIG. 17 have a configuration in which a special game right is being generated, and a high score can be expected. Then, similarly to the case where the negative determination is made, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 transmits a command to the symbol control unit 150, and the symbol control unit 150 displays a numeric symbol corresponding to the value of the table read in S54. The arrangement is displayed on the 7-segment display of each square of the winning symbol combination display device 17 (S55). That is, during the generation of the special game right, only one of the four tables 1 to 4 is continuously displayed. If a negative determination is made in S51, the return process ends.

Therefore, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140
By executing the table selection routine, it functions as combination changing means and score establishment opportunity increasing means. For this reason, it is possible to play a game without being influenced only by a configuration such as a nail arrangement on the game board 10. As described above, in the present embodiment, the table is selected based on the predetermined probability, and a combination in which a score is easily established is set in a plurality of tables. Disadvantageous conditions can be caused moderately.
As a result, it is possible to secure an appropriate base, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged unilaterally and preventing the player from playing a game while expecting only the hit result. As for the base securing, a base correction process described later can be executed. In addition, since the arrangement (table) of the numeric symbols is changed according to the table selection random number Rd of the counter, which table is selected is random and cannot be predicted.

Next, the chance time process will be described with reference to FIG.
This will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. here,
The “chance time” means the winning symbol combination display device 17
In the table displayed in the above table, a game period after the game following the game in which the above-mentioned square symbol was established (that is, a game in which the numeric symbols of the four central squares are alternately flashed in red or green and orange) And
Regardless of the number of games, it means the game period until 40 points are achieved. By providing the "chance time", it is possible to change the process of establishing a score, which is a game mode of the conventional arrangement ball type pachinko machine, to further enhance the interest of the player.

In this chance time processing routine, it is first determined whether or not one game has been completed, almost in the same manner as in the table selection routine (S61). Here, when an affirmative determination that one game is over is made (S61: YES), the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 determines whether or not a square symbol was established in the immediately preceding one game (S62). If an affirmative determination is made that the square symbol has been established (S62: YE
S), any one of tables “1” to “4” corresponding to each table selection random number Rd5 from the values “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” of the table selection random number Rd5 of the random number counter C5 Is read (S63). The tables 1 to 4 as examples shown in FIG. 19 are configured only during the chance time, and can expect a relatively high score. Then, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140 transmits a command to the symbol control unit 150, and the symbol control unit 150 displays an array of numeric symbols corresponding to the values of the table read in S63 by the symbol combination display device 17. It is displayed on the 7-segment display of each cell (S64).

Further, in order to notify the player that the current game has entered the "chance time", a chance time display arranged at the lower center of the winning symbol display device 25 via the symbol control unit 150 is displayed. The symbol “C” is displayed on the 7-segment display of the unit 25c, and the information display LEDs 31 arranged below the guidance symbol display device 16 are simultaneously turned on via the decoration control unit 160. As described above, all eight red LEDs are turned on, one red LED is turned off every time 5 points are established regardless of the number of games, and all 8 red LEDs are turned off when 40 points are established. I do. That is, the remaining points that can be established are displayed. During the chance time, only one of the four tables 1 to 4 is continuously displayed. If a negative determination is made in S61 or S62, the return process ends. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not 40 points have already been achieved (S66). If an affirmative determination is made that the 40 points have already been established (S66: YES), the "chance time" is ended (S68), and the return process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made (S66: NO),
In the guide symbol display device 16, it is determined whether or not the guide symbol has changed and stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) (S67). If a positive determination is made (S67: YE
S), forcibly end "chance time"
(S68), the exit process ends in return. If a negative determination is made (S67: NO), the "chance time" is maintained. Therefore, the CPU 141 of the main control unit 140
Executing the chance time processing routine functions as a means for increasing the chance of achieving a score.

Next, the probability improvement routine will be described with reference to FIG.
This will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. This is to increase the probability of hit which is normally low during the "chance time". As a result, the occurrence probability of the special game right is improved. This allows the player to make effective use of the “chance time” and further enhances the interest of the game. In this probability improvement routine, it is first determined whether or not "chance time" has been entered (S7).
1). If a positive determination is made during the chance time (S7
1: YES), as described above, the probability of hitting in the hit / fail determination is improved and the probability is high (S72). In other words, the number of times that the guide symbol on the guide symbol display device 16 is stopped and displayed in the same symbol and is determined relatively increases. If the “chance time” has not been entered (S71: NO), the exit processing ends in return.

Next, the base correction processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. This is to increase the possibility that at least one point can be achieved in the next one game in the case where a score is not achieved for three consecutive games and there is no payout of prize balls or the like. By executing the base correction process, it is possible to prevent the player from decreasing his / her willingness to play and to increase the so-called customer satisfaction of the arranged ball-type pachinko machine.

In this base correction processing routine, it is first determined whether or not three games have been continuously completed (S8).
1). If an affirmative judgment is made that three games have been completed (S8
1: YES), it is determined whether or not a score has been achieved during the three games (S82). If a negative determination is made that no point has been achieved (S82: NO), the random number counter C3
Table selection random numbers Rd3 values "0", "1",
Table "1" corresponding to each table selection random number Rd3 from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7"
The value of any one of .about. "8" is read (S83). As described above, the tables 1 to 8 as examples shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 have a configuration in which a score is easily established, that is, a base is easily secured. And the main control unit 14
The CPU 141 of 0 transmits a command to the symbol control unit 150, and an array of numeric symbols corresponding to the values of the table read in S83 by the symbol control unit 150 is displayed in each of the squares of the winning symbol combination display device 17. It is displayed on the segment display (S84). When a negative determination is made in S81, or when a positive determination is made in S82,
Return processing ends. Therefore, the main control unit 14
The zero CPU 141 functions as a means for increasing the chance of achieving a score by executing the base correction processing routine.

(Second Aspect) Next, as a second embodiment,
Arranged ball-type pachinko machines as combination game machines (also simply called pachinko machines) 1001 are shown in FIGS.
This will be described with reference to FIG.

The front portion of the pachinko machine 1001 is provided with a main frame 1.
002, a middle frame 1003, a front frame 1004, an upper plate portion 1005, a lower plate portion 1006, and a locking device 1007. The main body frame 1002 is obtained by assembling and fixing a wooden plate-like body into a substantially rectangular frame shape. Middle frame 1
003 is made of plastic and has a frame portion (not shown).
And a lower plate portion (not shown), and is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 1002. A locking device 1007 is provided at the center of the right end of the middle frame 1003, and the locking device 1007 is
It has a substantially rectangular shape with a keyhole when viewed from the front, and the front frame 1
This is for locking when 004 is closed.

Here, the frame portion is moved downward from the upper end to the middle frame 10.
03 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in about 2/3 of the entirety of the front panel 03. At the upper end portion, corresponding to the substantially triangular frame decoration LED lenses 1004c and 1004e of the front frame 1004, the award ball display LED is on the left side. (Not shown) and a prize ball display LED board 1004d (see FIG. 27) have a stop display LE on the right side.
D (not shown) and stop display LED board 1004f
(See FIG. 27).

Further, the lower plate portion extends upward from the lower end to the middle frame 10.
Occupies approximately one-third of the entire plate 03, and the upper plate 10
A speaker 1400a (see FIG. 26) for generating a sound effect and other sounds (sounds) according to the game state is provided to correspond to the speaker surface 1005a formed on the game surface 05, and a game ball is fired substantially at the center. Launcher unit 1
008 (see FIG. 24), a supply device (not shown) for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate portion 1005 is provided.

Further, below the lower plate portion, there is provided a lower plate portion 1006 provided with an ashtray, a ball-drawing lever, and the like.
At the approximate center of 006, a discharge port 1006a for discharging game balls from the inside of the pachinko machine 1001 is opened, and a firing handle 1009 for operating a firing device unit 1008 (see FIG. 24) is provided at the right end. Further, a touch switch 1009a for detecting that the player is touching is mounted on the firing handle 1009, and a fire stop switch 1009b for temporarily instructing a stop of the fire is arranged near the touch switch 1009a.

The front frame 1004 is entirely made of plastic and has a game area 101 formed on the game board 1010 so that the game board 1010 (see FIG. 23) can be visually recognized from the front.
1 (see FIG. 23), the upper side has a substantially circular arc shape, and has an opening 1004a opened in a substantially bullet shape as a whole. On the back surface, an opening 1004a is provided.
A substantially rectangular glass frame (not shown) in which a glass plate is fitted according to (1) is mounted. The front frame 100
Reference numeral 4 occupies about ／ of the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1001, and is pivotally mounted on the left end of the middle frame 1003 so as to be openable and closable. Further, a frame decoration lamp lens 1004b is provided at the upper end, and a frame decoration lamp substrate (game effect lamp substrate) 1004g (FIG. 2) is provided inside the lens 1004b along the arc at the upper end of the opening 1004a.
7) and a plurality of gaming effect lamps (not shown).

The upper plate 1005 is pivotally attached to the left end of the middle frame 1003 below the front frame 1004 and is formed to be openable and closable. On the outer edge portion 1005b of the dish, a ball removal button, a game ball lending / returning button, and the like are provided. Further, the upper plate portion 1005 is provided with a discharge port 1005c for discharging game balls from inside the pachinko machine 1001.
On the left end, a speaker surface 1005a having a plurality of long holes
The volume switch board 1012 is formed on the back surface.
(See FIG. 26). Pachinko machine 1001
Of the prepaid card unit 1013 (C
R unit) is mounted.

Next, the surface structure of the game board 1010 of this embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 1010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body,
03 (see FIG. 22), and the back side thereof is covered by a back mechanism panel 1102 (see FIG. 24) described later. A substantially circular game area 1011 is formed on the game board 1010 by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) as game area partition members provided on the surface of the game board 1010, and the game area 1011 is formed. Inside, there is a guide symbol operation gate 1016 as a start detection device, a guide symbol display device 1017 as a variable display device, an accessory object operation port 1018 as a first variable ball entry device, and guidance as a specific ball entry region. Increase device operating region 1019 and guidance device 10 capable of guiding a game ball to the guidance increasing device operation region 1019
20a as a specific ball entry device as a specific ball entry device
Reference numeral 21, an accessory operation device operation gate 1022 as an accessory operation detection device, an accessory operation port (score increasing device operation port) 1023 as a second variable ball entry device, and 16 entry areas are mutually 16 consecutive entry ports 1024 arranged adjacent to each other,
Entry symbol display device (identification information display device) for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each entry area of 16 consecutive entry ports 1024
1025 and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) and the like are provided.

The guide symbol operation gate 1016 is disposed above the left half surface from the center of the game area 1011 and has a passage detection switch 1016a (see FIG. 25) inside. When a game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 1016a, variable display of a plurality of symbols is started on the guide symbol display device 1017. Guide symbol display device 10
17 is arranged below the left half side of the game area 1011,
Three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area 1017a,
Middle symbol display area 1017b, right symbol display area 1017c
And a plurality of symbols can be variably stopped and displayed. In the guide symbol display device 1017, for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the same three-digit symbol of "7, 7, 7", the accessory operation port 1018
Is released.

The accessory operation port 1018 is provided in the game area 1011.
And a pair of movable pieces 1018a, 1018a,
18b, and based on the operation of the movable pieces 1018a and 1018b, the player enters an open state that is advantageous for entering the ball. In addition, a switch 1018 for detecting the entrance of the accessory actuation port is provided inside.
c (see FIG. 29), and when a game ball is detected by the ball detection switch 1018c, one or a plurality of pieces of identification information in the ball entry symbol display device 1025 are lit and displayed. Specifically, the display is turned on including identification information corresponding to the ball entry area where entry of the obstacle is relatively difficult. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 1011 and open the accessory operating port 1018 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

The specific entrance 1021 is in the game area 1011
And a guide device 1020a capable of guiding a game ball to the guide increase device operating region 1019, as described above.
The guiding device 1020a is a concave accessory called a so-called crune, in which three holes are formed at the bottom, and one hole formed on the front side toward the game board 1010 is a guiding increasing device operating area 1019. In the operation guiding region 1020b that can be guided to the left, two holes formed on the back side are defined as a non-operation guiding region 1020c. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the non-operation guiding area 1020c is guided to an area other than the guidance increasing apparatus operation area 1019 (non-specific ball entry area).

The entrance of the specific entrance 1021 is formed above the guidance device 1020a, and the game ball entered from this entrance goes through a predetermined rotation mode (circular movement mode) by the guidance device 1020a. Later, the guidance increase device operating area 10
19 or a region other than the guidance increase device operating region 1019. Guidance increase device operation area 1019
Is provided below the guidance device 1020a and below the operation guidance region 1020b, and includes a guidance increase device operation region passage detection switch 1019a (see FIG. 29) inside. When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 1019a, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry symbol display device 1025 is lit and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is activated. When activated, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. Note that the guidance increasing device is a special device mainly configured by the main control unit 1140 (see FIG. 25) and changing a game state.

The accessory guidance device operating gate 1022 is disposed above the right half surface side from the center of the game area 1011 and has therein the accessory guidance device operating gate passage detection switch 1022a.
(See FIG. 29). During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 1022a of the accessory guiding device operating gate 1022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 1023 is opened.

Accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 102
Reference numeral 3 denotes a pair of movable pieces 1023a and 1023b, which are arranged at the lower center of the game area 1011.
Based on the operations of 023a and 1023b, an open state that is advantageous for the player to enter the ball is provided. In addition, there is provided an accessory entry opening ball detection switch 1023c (see FIG. 29) inside, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 1023c, predetermined identification information of the entry symbol display device 1025 (generally difficult to enter). The identification information corresponding to the large ball entry area is lit and displayed, and the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 1011 and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 1023 based on the operation of the openable and closable panel.

[0175] The 16 consecutive entrances 1024 are provided in the game area 101.
1, a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 1025 is provided in front of the lowermost portion.
A 16 consecutive ball detection switch 1025a (see FIG. 25) is provided inside each of the 16 continuous ball entrances 1024, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 1025a, a ball corresponding to the ball entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 1025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 1001, the launching of 16 game balls is defined as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on the combination of the identification information illuminated and displayed in the 16 games. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. Note that the entering symbol display device (identification information display device) 1025 can be, for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, or a liquid crystal (LCD) display.
When a game ball is detected at 025a, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix or a liquid crystal (LC) of a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 1025 corresponding to the ball-in area.
D) The identification information (number) is displayed on the display screen.

Next, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 1001 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Front frame 10
04 (see FIG. 22) is in the middle frame 1003, and the front frame 1
A pair of hinges 110 provided at the upper and lower positions of 004
1 and supported so as to be openable and closable. Back mechanism panel 110
Reference numeral 2 denotes a middle frame 1003, which is supported by a pair of hinges 1103 provided at the upper and lower ends of the back mechanism panel 1102 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 1010 (see FIG. 23) is detachably attached to the front side of the middle frame 1003. On the left side when viewed from the position of the hinge 1101 on the upper end side, a prize ball tank 1105 provided with a tank ball out detection switch 1104 at the bottom of the tank, and a prize ball tank 11
A tank rail 1106 connected to the fuel cell 05 is attached. A ball release lever 1107 is provided on the right side of the tank rail 1106, a supply ball out detection switch 1108 is provided downstream thereof, and a prize ball payout device 1109 is provided downstream thereof. I have.

Subsequently, a game ball distribution unit 1110 is provided on the downstream side of the prize ball payout device 1109. On the lower side of the tank rail 1106, a guide symbol display device 1017 is provided.
Is provided with a back case 1111 with a lid that stores a display panel (a liquid crystal display panel or a 7-segment LED display panel). Below the back case 1111, a main control unit 1140 (see FIG. 25) described below is provided. Main control board 1340
A main control board case 1112 (see FIG. 25) is provided. On the left side of the main control board case 1112, a launcher control board case 1113 storing a launcher control board 1201 (see FIG. 25) as a launch control unit 1201a (see FIG. 25), and a launch control collective relay board 1
116 are provided. In the lower left part of the back mechanism panel 1102, the above-described firing device unit 1008 is provided. Similarly, in the lower right part, a frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 1150 (FIG. 25).
Frame status display 1 that displays a 7-segment LED to indicate clogging of supply balls, filling of lower plate portion, abnormality of main power supply voltage, firing stop, communication abnormality of main control board, abnormality of prize ball motor, etc.
Frame control board case (prize ball control board case) 11 in which a prize ball control board 1350 (see FIG. 25) provided with 117 is stored.
18 are provided.

On the other hand, at the upper right end of the back mechanism panel 1102,
Fuse box 1119, power switch 1120, power terminal board 1121, jackpot, launcher control,
A frame external terminal board 1122 having an external connection terminal for a game machine frame such as a ball cut, a door open, a prize ball, and a ball rental is provided. A power cable 1123 for receiving supply of electric power from the outside is also provided below the frame external terminal board 1122. A connection cable 1124 extends upward from the frame control board case 1118 in which the frame control board 1350 (see FIG. 25) is stored, and a prepaid card unit (CR unit) 1013 having a power cable 1125.
It is connected to the. In addition, a ball passage member 1126 for the lower plate portion is provided substantially at the lower end of the center of the back mechanism panel 1102.

Next, an electronic control unit 1130 of the pachinko machine 1001 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the electronic control unit 1130 includes a main control unit 1140
And a winning ball control unit (frame control unit) 1150 connected to the main control unit 1140, a symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit)
1160, lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 11
70 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 1180. The main control unit 1140 includes a main control board 1340. The four control units 1150, 1160, 1170, and 1180 other than the main control unit 1140 are each configured as a sub control unit, and a prize ball control board (frame) serving as a sub control board. Control board) 1350, symbol display device control board 1
360, a lamp output device control board 1370 and an audio output device control board 1380 are provided.

The main control board 1340 includes the CP shown in FIG.
U1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 14
The control program stored in the ROM 1482 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 1001 (ie, the basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Referring back to FIG. 25, main control unit 1140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing the sub-control units 1150, 1160, 1170, and 1180 to perform processing. In addition, the main control unit 1140 to each sub-control unit 1150,
Data is transmitted to 1160, 1170, and 1180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 1140 to 1180 has a power receiving board 1128 connected to the main power supply 1129.
To the power supply unit 1127 and further to the power supply relay board 11
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at the time of power-on, which will be described later, is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 1121.

The main controller 1140 is connected to a 16-switch relay board 1031, a relay board 1200, a guide symbol operation gate passage detection switch 1016a, a frame external terminal board 1122, and a frame relay board 1200b. 1
The 16-connection ball detection switch 1025a is connected to the 6-connection switch relay board 1031. A detection signal from the 16-connection ball detection switch 1025a is transmitted to the main control unit 1140. Note that the main control unit 1140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 1807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43, the main control board 1340 is provided with a game information output circuit section 1347, a conversion circuit section 1341, and an output connector 1342. The game information output from the game information output circuit unit 1347 is converted by the conversion circuit unit 1341 into information that can be read by the test device 1807, and the converted game information is converted to the connector 1342.
Is output to the test apparatus 1807 via the. In this case, the control content of the main control unit 1140 can be output to the test device 1807 simply by connecting the harness from the test device 1807 to the connector 1342. As shown in FIG. 44, the relay board 1344 for relaying between the main control board 1340 and the test apparatus 1807 is attached to the pachinko machine 10.
01 can also be provided. In this case, the main control board 13
Forty connectors 1343 and connectors 1346 of the relay board 1344 are connected, and a harness from the test apparatus 1807 is connected to the connector 1345 of the relay board 1344. The game information is output from the game information output circuit section 1347 of the main control board 1340 to the relay board 1344 as a conversion circuit section via the connector 1343.
At 344, the data is converted into a format readable by the test apparatus 1807, and is output from the relay board 1344 to the test apparatus 1807.

Returning to FIG. 25, on the relay board 1200, as shown in FIG.
8c, detection increase device operation area passage detection switch 1019
a, Access control device gate detection switch 1022
a, accessory actuation opening (score increasing device actuation opening) ball detection switch 1023c, accessory actuation opening solenoid 1018d, accessory actuation opening (score increasing device activation opening) solenoid 1023d,
The board external terminal board 1032 and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port solenoid 1018d is a solenoid for opening and closing the movable pieces 1018a and 1018b of the accessory actuation port 1018. The accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) solenoid 1023d is connected to the accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) 1
This is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 1023a and 1023b. The board external terminal board 1032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 25, the frame external terminal board 1122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 1104, a door switch 1202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 1150. As shown in FIG. 30, the frame relay board 1200b is connected with a supply ball out detection switch 1108, a prize ball counting sensor 1198, a lower tray full switch 1199, a foul ball sensor 1197, and the like. Note that the supply ball out detection switch 11
08 is a switch for detecting running out of the ball between the tank rail 1106 (see FIG. 24) and the prize ball payout device 1109 (see FIG. 24). The lower tray full switch 1199 is a switch for detecting that the lower tray of the lower tray 1006 (see FIG. 22) is full.
The foul ball sensor 1197 has a launcher unit 1008
A game ball fired from the game area 10 (see FIG. 24)
11 (see FIG. 23), the launch rail (not shown)
This is a sensor for detecting a game ball returning to the lower plate portion 1006 from the bottom.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 1150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 1140, and includes a memory clear switch substrate 1191,
Ball lending counting sensor 1192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 1013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 1
194, a CR operation board 1195, a prize ball motor sensor board 1196, a launching apparatus control board 1201 and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 1191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 1192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 1013 for lending the ball. A sensor for counting the number, the prize ball flow switching solenoid 1194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 1109. A CR operation board 1195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards to and from a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 1013. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 1297.

As shown in FIG. 38, the launching device control board 1201 is connected to a ball feed solenoid relay board 1092, a launching motor 1093, a launching ball count switch 1094, a launching stop switch 1009b, and a launching handle 1009. A ball feed solenoid 1091 is connected to the ball feed solenoid relay board 1092, and the upper plate 100
5 (see FIG. 22) for sending the game balls stored one by one to the firing position. Launch motor 1093
The game ball sent to the launch position, the game area 1011
(See FIG. 23) This is a motor that operates a firing hammer for driving the hammer. The launch ball count switch 1094 is
This is a switch for counting the number of game balls fired, and is fired in the game area 1011 (see FIG. 23) by the detection information from the switch 1094 and the detection information from the foul ball sensor 1197 (see FIG. 30). When the number of launched balls (valid number of launched balls) is counted as 16, one game (unit game) ends.

Returning to FIG. 25, the symbol display device control section 116
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor). The arithmetic circuit components are interconnected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 1140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 28, a guide symbol display device board 1017d having a display panel is connected to the symbol display device control unit 1160, and the CPU uses a control program stored in the ROM to set the guide symbol display device using the RAM as a work area. The operation control of the (display panel) 1017 (that is, the display control of the display device) is performed. The display control of the entry symbol display device 1025 is assumed to be performed by the main control unit 1140.
This display control can also be performed by the symbol display device control unit 1160.

The lamp output device control unit 1170 has the same arithmetic circuit component (CP) as the symbol display device control unit 1160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.), and are connected to the main control unit 1140 at the input / output ports. As shown in FIG. 27, an illumination relay board 1171a, various LED boards, and the like are connected to the lamp output device control unit 1170. A game effect lamp substrate 1004g, a prize ball display LED substrate 10
04d etc. are connected, and the prize ball display LED board 100
A stop display LED board 1004f and the like are connected to 4d. These lamps and the like are turned on / off or flashed in accordance with the progress of the game, thereby enhancing the game effect.

The audio output device control unit 1180 has the same arithmetic circuit component (CP) as the symbol display device control unit 1160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown), and are connected to the main control unit 1140 at the input / output ports. As shown in FIG. 26, an audio relay board 1203 is connected to the audio output device control unit 1180, and a volume switch board 1012 connected to the audio relay board 1203 outputs an output volume when a volume switch (not shown) is operated. Are set, and various sounds, sounds, and the like are output from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game.

Further, various lamps such as the game effect lamp board 1004g and the sound generator mounted on the audio output device control board 1380 are provided with the symbol display device control section 11
The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol by the control of 60, the presence / absence of reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 1140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 1170 or the sound output device control unit 1180 as an operation command target.

The above-described symbol display device control section 116
0, the lamp output device control unit 1170 and the audio output device control unit 1180 include the main control unit 1140 and the frame control unit 1150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Next, the electronic control unit 113 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 will be described. FIG.
FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a board connection layout in a power supply unit of the electronic control unit 1130 (see FIG. 25). The electronic control unit 1130 (see FIG. 25)
8, an AC voltage (AC
24V). This AC voltage is supplied to the power receiving board 1
In 128, it is distributed to a connector 1413 and a connector 1414. A voltage supply cable 1503 is connected to the connector 1413, and the AC voltage is supplied to the power supply unit 112.
7 is supplied. An AC voltage supply cable 1514 is connected to the connector 1414, and the AC voltage (for driving the prize ball motor 1297) is supplied to the prize ball control board 1350 (FIG. 2).
5). The power receiving board 1128 is provided with a power fuse 1416 for shutting off a receiving voltage for overcurrent protection and a fuse 1417 for shutting off supply of 24 V AC to a prepaid card unit (CR unit) 1013 (see FIG. 22). ing.

The AC voltage from the power receiving board 1128 is
A power supply unit 112 having a voltage conversion unit (not shown) from
7 is distributed. The power supply unit 1127 has an input connector 1421 to which a transformation supply cable 1503 is connected.
Is formed, while the output terminals (1, 2, 2,
3, 6), an output connector 1422 including a ground terminal (4, 5) and a backup terminal (7, 8). The output connector 1422 shown in FIG.
Although only one 4V output terminal is illustrated, two 24V terminals for DC and pulsating current are actually formed. The backup terminal has an eighth terminal commonly connected to a ground terminal of a voltage converter (not shown) for DC5V, and a capacitor 1423 serving as a power storage means (backup power supply means) so as to extend between the seventh terminal and the ground terminal. Is connected, D
The C5V backup voltage is output from the seventh terminal.

Output connector 14 of power supply unit 1127
Reference numeral 22 denotes a power relay board 1121 via a cable 1504.
Of the power supply unit 11
Various power supply voltages converted and generated at 27 are supplied. And, on the power supply relay board 1121,
A plurality of control boards that control the operation of various game machines of the pachinko machine 1001, here, a main control board 1340, a prize ball control board 1350, a symbol display device control board 1360, a lamp output device control board 1370, a voice output device control board 1380
In order to connect the launcher control board 1201 and a board-side connector 1434 which collectively outputs power supply voltage output terminals used in each board, a board-side connector 1434 is provided corresponding to each board, and an input to each terminal is provided. The power supply voltage and the backup voltage from the connector 1433 are distributed.
Although one connector 1434 is shown for convenience in the drawing, a plurality of connectors are provided on the power supply relay board 1121 in correspondence with each control board. In the case of the present embodiment, the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 1340 and the prize ball control board 1350 which are directly related to the distribution of the game balls.

Here, the board side connector 1434 does not have any spare terminal portion, and the wiring toward the corresponding board is connected to all the formed terminal portions. Specifically, the board side connector 1434 includes only the output terminal of each power supply voltage and the ground terminal, or only the output terminal of each power supply voltage, the ground terminal, and the terminal for backup power supply. In order to respond flexibly to changes in the power supply system design, etc., it may be convenient to form a spare terminal section in order to facilitate the addition of a new power supply voltage terminal. By adopting a configuration in which all the terminals are used up without excess or shortage without intentionally forming the terminal portion, an advantage that illegal operation using spare terminals can be effectively prevented is brought about.

Next, FIG. 42 shows the power supply unit 11 described above.
27 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an internal configuration of a power supply monitoring module 27 including a power supply monitoring module 1553. FIG. First, the power receiving board 11
The output voltage from 28 is rectified and smoothed to 5 V DC or the like in a constant voltage circuit section 1552 in the power supply unit 1127, and is input to, for example, a power supply terminal VCC of a prize ball control section 1150 (main control section 1140). Are connected to a backup terminal via an auxiliary power supply circuit (power storage means) 1556. The auxiliary power supply circuit 1556 stores the RAM 168 when the power supply from the constant voltage circuit section 1552 is interrupted due to the interruption of the power supply from the power receiving board 1128 due to a power failure or the output voltage drops below a predetermined value.
CPUs 1601 and 1401 provided with
6) to ensure the necessary operating voltage. Here, the storage means for maintaining the output voltage, specifically, the capacitor 1557 forms the main part of the auxiliary power supply circuit 1556. Note that the power supply terminal V
A capacitor 1557b is provided on the way to the CC, and when the power supply is cut off, the capacitor 1557b compensates for the voltage supply until the backup voltage is supplied from the auxiliary power supply circuit 1556. Further, the capacity of the capacitor 1557b is set to at least the RAM 1681 and 1481 until the backup process described later is completed.
It is desirable that the setting is made to the extent that the operations of the CPUs 1601 and 1401 (see FIG. 36) including the above can be secured.

The capacitor 1557 is connected to the constant voltage circuit 15
52 is connected in parallel to the power supply line from VCC to VCC.
The battery 552 is maintained in a charged state by being supplied with power. When the power supply is interrupted, the capacitor 1557 is discharged while the backflow is prevented by the diode 1558, and the CPU 1157 including the RAMs 1681 and 1481 is discharged.
An operating voltage is supplied to 601 and 1401 (see FIG. 36). It is desirable that the capacity of the capacitor 1557 be set to such an extent that at least the operation of the RAMs 1681 and 1481 can be ensured until a series of processes from the backup process at the time of power failure to the return process is completed.
In addition, the auxiliary power supply circuit 1556 may be configured using a battery (in this case, either a primary battery or a secondary battery) 1557a instead of the capacitor 1557.

On the other hand, the output voltage VX from the constant voltage circuit section 1552 is branched and input to a comparator 1569 functioning as abnormality detecting means (here, power cutoff detecting means), where the voltage level Vs of the voltage monitoring reference signal 1567
Is compared to VS is an output voltage (for example, 12 V) from a predetermined terminal of the constant voltage circuit unit 1552,
It can be set corresponding to the lower limit voltage level at which stable operations of 1601 and 1401 (see FIG. 36) cannot be performed. Normally, VX> VS, and the output of the comparator 1569 is in the first state (here, L level).
When VX <VS due to a power failure or the like, the comparator 1569
Is in a second state (H level here) different from the first state described above.

The output of the comparator 1569 is A as output means of a power cutoff signal (abnormality detection signal).
The signal is input to one terminal of an ND gate 1570 (abnormality information generating means). The other terminal of the AND gate 1570 is supplied with a power-off signal generation reference signal 1568. This power-off signal generation reference signal 15
68 has a voltage level VY corresponding to the second state of the comparator 1569 (here, VS =
VY). Therefore, only when the output of the comparator 1569 is in the second state, the AND gate 1570 outputs the power cutoff signal VK (here, L level), which is the interrupt terminal of the CPU 1601, 1401 (see FIG. 36). Is input to

Comparator 1569 and AND gate 1
The operating voltage of 570 is a constant voltage circuit section 1552 (output: +
12V). In addition, AND gate 1
Since the operating voltage of 570 is +5 V, the voltage dividing resistor 1570
a, 1570b (DC-DC
The voltage may be adjusted by a converter or the like. Further, the above-described voltage monitoring reference signal 1567 and reference signal 1568 for generating a power cutoff signal are also supplied to the constant voltage circuit 1552.
(The voltage level is determined by the voltage dividing resistors 1563 and 1563.
64 is adjusted by the adjusting unit 1560 comprising the H.64.
Note that the power supply from the constant voltage circuit 1552 is interrupted during a power failure, so that the diode 1562 and the capacitor 156
A reference signal auxiliary power supply circuit 1559 having the same configuration as that of the auxiliary power supply circuit 1556 and having a value of 1 is provided.

In this embodiment, when a power failure such as a power failure occurs, the supply of auxiliary power from the power storage means causes
Game medium information for establishing a game mode is stored and held (backed up) in AM1681 and 1481 (see FIG. 36). For example, when an error occurs, the CPU
When the CPUs 1601 and 1401 (see FIG. 36) receive the NMI interrupt signal, the CPUs 1601 and 1401 (see FIG. 36)
The control program information for establishing the game mode written in the register of the CPU 1601, 140
1 (see FIG. 36).
481 (see FIG. 36), and the control program information is stored and held (backed up). In addition, game information stored in the RAMs 1681 and 1481 (see FIG. 36) at the time of occurrence of an abnormality is also stored and held in the RAMs 1681 and 1481.

The AC2 from the power receiving board 1128
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which another voltage level value such as 4 V is monitored, and the backup voltage is supplied when the voltage level falls below a predetermined value. The timing of changing the monitored voltage value and the power interruption signal (NMI interrupt signal) can be variously changed according to the control unit to be backed up. For example, in order to prevent extra payout for the prize ball motor 1297 (see FIG. 25), the determination can be made with reference to the drive voltage of the motor 1297. Further, it is possible to determine the timing of changing the power interruption signal and the system reset signal in consideration of the time required for payout.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1001 will be described focusing on the processing executed by the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 1140. When the pachinko machine 1001 is started, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the main job shown in FIG. 31 is repeated. Execute.

As shown in FIG. 31, in the main job, the CPU 1401 sets the start handle check job (S100) as the firing handle 1009 (FIG. 25).
), Whether the game start flag is set, whether the start / stop switch attached to the
It is determined whether the count value of No. 4 (see FIG. 25) is less than 16.

Next, in the game start job (S200),
As shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 1401 determines in S201 whether or not the game end flag is “1”. And the timer is checked, set, or cleared, and the process returns when a negative determination is made. Note that the game end flag is set in the above-described initial setting, and thereafter, the S1
000 in the game end job (see FIG. 31).

Returning to FIG. 31, the following launch control job (S3
00), the CPU 1401 confirms the set time and the operation state of the firing handle 1009 (see FIG. 38), and turns on / off the firing motor 1093 (see FIG. 38) of the firing device unit 1008 (see FIG. 24) based on the confirmation result. Execute OFF control. Then, following the launch control job (S300), a launch count job (S400) is executed.
In this firing number counting job (S400), the state of the firing ball count switch 1094 (see FIG. 38), the operation time of the firing motor 1093 (see FIG. 38), the foul ball based on the signal of the foul ball sensor 1197 (see FIG. 30). Are confirmed and the firing counter is updated. The number-of-launches counter provided in the main control unit 1140 (see FIG. 25) includes the number of fired balls detected by the fired ball count switch 1094 (see FIG. 38) and the foul ball sensor 1197 (see FIG. 30). The difference from the detected foul sphere, that is, the number of effective firing spheres is written.

Next, a random number update job (S500) for updating the count value of the random number counter for judging the success or failure is performed. This is a random number update job for determining whether or not a symbol is accepted by the guide symbol display device 1017 using random numbers. As shown in FIG. 33, in the random number update job (S500) executed as a random number process, the CPU 1401
In step S501, the value of the random number provided in the setting area of the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) is incremented by one, and in step S502, it is determined whether the value of the incremented random number is 50 or more. Here, if an affirmative judgment is made that the value of the random number is 50 or more, a process of clearing the value of the random number to 0 is performed in S503. Thereafter, when a negative determination is made that the value of the random number is less than 50, the routine returns. The random number value updated in this way is acquired at a predetermined timing (at the time of detection of passage at the guidance symbol operation gate 1016), and is compared with a predetermined determination value to determine the determination as to whether or not the determination is made (the determination job). ).

Returning to FIG. 31, the game job (S60
0) is executed. As a subroutine of this game job (S600), a symbol display job (S6) shown in FIG.
10) is performed. In this symbol display job (S610), the CPU 1401 determines in step S611 that the accessory operation opening ball detection switch 1018c (see FIG. 29) and the accessory operation opening (score increasing device operation opening) entrance detection switch 1023c.
(See FIG. 29), 16 consecutive entry ball detection switches 1025a
(See FIG. 25). If there is a detection signal from these, in S612 the entering symbol display device 1025
The number lamp corresponding to is displayed. In the entry symbol display device 1025, for example, if four consecutive number lamps are displayed in combination, a score is established, and a predetermined number of game balls and the like are paid out.

Also, as a subroutine of the game job (S600), the guide symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG.
0) is performed separately. In addition, the guide symbol operation gate 101
6 (that is, the guide symbol operation detection switch 101)
6a), the above-mentioned determination job is performed, and a random number for symbol determination and a random number for reach mode determination are obtained.
M1482 (see FIG. 36). First, S62
In 1, based on the passing of the game ball to the guide symbol operation gate 1016, the variable display of each symbol (in this case, a three-digit guide symbol) is started on the guide symbol display device 1017. Next, in S622, referring to the success / failure result obtained in the success / failure determination job, in the case of hit determination ("1") (S623: YES), the process proceeds to S632, and the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is determined. And further proceeds to S633, similarly reads the jackpot number determined by the random number, and proceeds to S631, for example, after aligning the left symbol and the middle symbol to the same symbol and passing through a predetermined reach display mode, the right symbol is left The same pattern as the symbol and the middle symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed for confirmation.

On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, where the off-reach symbol number and the off-right symbol number determined by the random numbers are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation determination ("3") (S625), the flow proceeds to S626, where each deviation symbol number determined by the random number is read, and the flow proceeds to S627. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. It should be noted that, even in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes, such as delaying the variable display time of only one symbol.

[0212] Such a guide symbol display job (S62)
The display mode determined in 0) is output as a corresponding command data (command signal) from the main control unit 1140 to the symbol display device control unit 1160 at a predetermined time interval,
The symbol display device control unit 1160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data. Note that the symbol display device control unit 1160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), display control in the guide symbol display device 1017 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 1160.

Returning to FIG. 31, an interval timer set job (S700) is subsequently executed. As shown in FIG. 37, this interval timer set job (S70
In 0), the CPU 1401 determines in S701 whether or not the game is in progress.
In 702, it is determined whether or not the number of effective firing balls is less than 16 based on the count value of the firing number counter. If a negative determination is made, it is determined whether or not the count value of the interval timer is “0” in subsequent S703, and if a positive determination is made, the interval flag is set to “1” in subsequent S704. If a negative determination is made in S701 and S703 and an affirmative determination is made in S702, the process returns. For example, the launch ball count switch 1094 indicates that the last game ball of the 16th set ball has been launched.
(See FIG. 25) After a certain period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the detection was made, or when the 16th last game ball, which is the setting ball, has entered the 16-connection ball opening 1024 for 16 times. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after detection by the detection signal from the ball detection switch 1025a (see FIG. 25), a predetermined time is set as a start time,
The interval from the start time to the start of the next game is defined as an interval period.

Returning to FIG. 31, the score calculation job (S
800) is performed. As shown in FIG. 35, in the score calculation job (S800), in S801, the CPU 1401 determines whether or not the combination display related to the achievement of the score on the entering symbol display device 1025 is established during one game, and makes an affirmative determination. If so, the process proceeds to S802, and the score for the combination is added. In subsequent S803, it is determined whether or not the score increasing device is operating. If the determination is affirmative, the score added in S802 is doubled. If the determination is negative, the process returns. Note that if a negative determination is made in S801, the process skips to S803, but the skip to S803 may be omitted and the process may return to the return.

Returning to FIG. 31, in S900, a payout job is executed, and based on the score data set in the score calculation job (S800), data acquisition for award ball payout and the like are performed. When one game is over, a score achieved in one game is displayed as a payout score on a score display device (not shown).
Six game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the entered ball symbol display device 1025 is turned off. However, the upper limit of the points is 10 points, and the points exceeding 10 points are not subject to the prize ball payout.

The game end job executed last (S10
In (00), the CPU 1401 determines whether or not the interval flag is set to “1”. Judge. If the adjustment time has elapsed, the interval flag is set to "1", and if the interval timer is counted up, the game end (unit game end) flag is set to "1" and the routine returns.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 1001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 1016, the guide symbol display device 101
7 is activated. When the predetermined symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 1017, the accessory operation port 10 is displayed.
The 18 movable pieces 1018a and 1018b are opened for a predetermined time. The opening time depends on the combination of the above symbols,
When the display is confirmed with an odd three-digit same symbol ("7", "7", "7", etc.), 2.5 digits, a three-digit odd symbol including "7"("3""5""7") ) Is opened for 0.3 seconds. When a game ball enters the accessory operation port 1018, Nos. 5 and 8 of the entry symbol display device 1025 are lit and displayed. The 5th and 8th are 16 consecutive ball entrances 10
It corresponds to 24 entrances that are difficult to enter.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the specific entrance 1021, the game ball temporarily moves in the guide device 1020 a as a guideable state, and thereafter, the operation guide region 1020 b and the non-operation guide region. 1020c, 102
0c. Here, the operation guidance area 1
When the user enters the guidance increase device operation area 1019 from 020b, the guidance increase device (main control unit) is activated, and a special game state occurs. This guidance increasing device is supposed to operate continuously up to a maximum of 14 unit games (14 games), and the number of times of this right is provided on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 1011 during the generation of the right. Number of rights display device 102
7, the number of remaining rights is displayed at the time of starting the next unit game (game).

The above is the game mode according to the normal game state, in which the guide symbol operation gate 1016, the guide symbol display device 1017, and the accessory operation port 1018 are a group of game devices for the first game mode (normal game state). It is functioning. Also,
Specific entrance 1021, guidance device 1020a, operation guidance region 1020b, non-operation guidance region 1020c, 1020
c, the guidance increase device operation area 1019 functions as a game device group for the second game mode (for generating a special game).

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 1022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 102
3 open for 2.0 seconds. When a game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) 1023, the numbers 8, 9, 12, and 13 of the entry symbol display device 1025 are lit and displayed, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The 8th, 9th, 12th and 13th are 16
It corresponds to the entrance opening of the continuous entrance opening 1024 where entry is difficult.
Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with the unit game of 14 times as an upper limit, and whether the unit game reaches 14 times,
The process ends when any one of the game balls enters the guidance increasing device operation area 1019. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operation gate 102
2. The accessory opening (scoring increasing device opening) 1023 is the third
Functioning as a game device group for the game mode (special game state).

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment is described.
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, in the guide symbol display device 1017, if the probability that the specific display mode to be hit is definitely displayed is increased, the rate at which the accessory operating port 1018 changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player is also increased. Prizes can be easily obtained, and the player's willingness to play can be reduced even in the normal state. In addition, it is possible to give the player a novel and novel gaming interest.

Next, a modification of the structure of the game board 1010 in the pachinko machine 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. In this case, in the gaming area 1011 of the gaming board 1010, the first gaming mode gaming device group is located on the left side of the board surface, the second gaming mode gaming device group is located on the central area, and the third gaming mode is located on the right side. Gaming devices are clearly arranged.

The gaming machine group for the first gaming mode includes a guide symbol operating gate 1916 and a role-operating port (first variable ball entry device) 1918 provided with a guide symbol display device 1917. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 1916, variable display of symbols is started on the guide symbol display device provided on the front side of the accessory operation port 1918, and the symbol is fixedly displayed after the variable display for a predetermined time. . When the fixedly displayed symbol has a predetermined specific display mode, the closed movable pieces 1918a and 1918b are closed.
Are opened right and left, and the accessory operation port 1918 is opened. When a game ball enters the accessory operation port 1918, a predetermined number lamp of the entry symbol display device 1025 is lit and displayed, similarly to the case where the game ball enters the accessory operation port 1018.

The second game mode game device group includes a specific entrance 1921 and a guidance device 1920. When a game ball enters the specific entrance 1921, it falls from directly above the concave plate of the guidance device 1920 via a gutter, a passage, or the like (not shown), and the game ball temporarily rotates (rotates) on the concave plate. )
Then, the operation guide region 19 formed by three holes is formed.
20b, and is guided to any of the non-operation induction regions 1920c and 1920c. When a game ball enters the guidance increase device operation region 1919 from the operation guidance region 1920b, the guidance increase device operates and a special game state occurs.

The gaming machine group for the third game mode includes a bonus object guidance device operation gate 1922 and a bonus item operation port (second variable ball entry device) 1923. During the special game state, when a game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 1922, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 1923 is opened for a predetermined time, and the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) is opened. ) 1
When a game ball enters the ball 923, a predetermined number lamp of the ball entry symbol display device 1025 is illuminated and displayed, and the score obtained during the game (unit game) is doubled, as in the above embodiment. The conditions for continuing the special game state are the same as in the above embodiment.

In the configuration of such a modified example, the game area is divided into three, and three types of game modes are played in different areas, so that a board configuration that is easy for even a game beginner to understand can be obtained. Further, since the guide symbol display device 1917 is integrated with the accessory operation port 1918, the game area can be effectively used.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is described.
Although 01 has been described, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the guide symbol display device can display a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal (LCD), and the guide device is not limited to the clune, but may be any device that can guide a game ball to two or more areas.

(Third Embodiment) Next, as a third embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply called a pachinko machine) 2001 as a combination game machine will be described. It should be noted that parts having a configuration different from that of the above-described second embodiment will be described.
It is assumed that it has the same configuration as the embodiment. In this case, the configuration of the game board is mainly different from that of the second embodiment.

The front portion of the pachinko machine 2001 of the third embodiment has the same main body frame, middle frame, front frame, and upper plate portion as the front portion of the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 2 formed on the front part
The surface structure 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 2010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 2010 includes a game board 20.
An outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the game machine 10 form a substantially circular game area 2011. In the game area 2011, the operation of the accessory guiding device as a specific detection device is performed. A gate 2016, a special action entrance 2018 as a first variable entrance apparatus, a specific entrance 2021 as a start detection apparatus including a specific entrance detection switch 2021a (see FIG. 46), and a variable display. Induction increase device operation determination symbol display device 2017 as a device, and accessory guidance device operation gate 2022 as a detection device for accessory operation
And an actor opening (score increasing device opening) 2023 as a second variable ball entry device, a 16 consecutive entry ball opening 2024 in which 16 entry regions are arranged adjacent to each other, and a 16 consecutive entry ball Mouth 2
An entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 2025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each entry area of No. 024, a number of obstacle nails (not shown), and the like are provided. The specific entrance 2021 has a storage unit 2020 as a storage device.
d, and the operation of the guidance increasing device that can guide the game balls stored in the storage unit 2020d to either the guidance increasing device operating region 2020b as the specific entering ball region or the stored ball discharging port 2020c as the non-specific entering ball region. An area guiding unit (guidance device) 2020a is formed.

[0230] The accessory guiding device operation gate 2016 is disposed above the left half side from the center of the game area 2011, and has a passage detection switch 2016a (see FIG. 48) inside. When a game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 2016a, the accessory operation port 2018 is opened.

The accessory operation port 2018 is provided in the game area 2011.
And a pair of movable pieces 2018a,
18b, and based on the operation of the movable pieces 2018a and 2018b, the player enters an open state that is advantageous for entering the ball. In addition, there is an accessory actuation port entrance ball detection switch
c (see FIG. 48). When a game ball is detected by the ball entry detection switch 2018c, one or a plurality of pieces of identification information in the ball entry symbol display device 2025 are lit and displayed. Specifically, the display is turned on including identification information corresponding to the ball entry area where entry of the obstacle is relatively difficult. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 2011, and to open the accessory operation opening 2018 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

The specific entrance 2021 is in the game area 2011
As described above, it is provided with a guidance increasing device operation area 2020b, a stored ball discharge port 2020c, and a guidance device 2020a capable of guiding a game ball to the guidance increasing device operation region 2020b. Guiding device 2020a
Is a rotating body called a so-called sorting device, and includes a concave storage portion 2020d that can temporarily store game balls that have entered the specific entrance 2021. The guidance device 2020a is rotatable in both left and right directions toward the game board 2010. When rotated counterclockwise, the guidance device 2020a guides the game balls stored in the storage unit 2020d to the guidance increase device operation area 2020b, and When rotated around, the game ball is guided to the stored ball discharge port 2020c. Note that the guidance device 2020a is
When a is not operated, that is, while the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 2017 is in the variable start waiting state or the variable display state, the game ball receiving waiting state or the guidance waiting state with the concave storage portion 2020d facing upward is set. .

[0233] The entrance of the specific entrance 2021 is
The game ball formed above the entrance 20a and entered from this entrance is stored in the storage unit 2020d of the guidance device 2020a, and then guided to either the guidance increase device operation area 2020b or the stored ball discharge port 2020c. You. The guidance increasing device operation area 2020b is provided at the lower left of the guidance device 2020a, and includes a guidance increasing device operation area passage detection switch 2019a (see FIG. 48) inside. When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 2019a, the guidance increasing device operates to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. It should be noted that the guidance increasing device is a main control unit 2140.
(Refer to FIG. 46) is a special device mainly configured to change a game state.

A specific entrance detection switch 2021a (see FIG. 46) is provided at the bottom of the storage section 2020d. Is started. The guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 2017 is disposed below the left half side of the game area 2011, and includes three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area 2017a, a middle symbol display area 2017b, and a right symbol display area 2017c, respectively. A plurality of symbols can be variably stopped and displayed. In the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 2017, for example, if the symbols are stopped and displayed together with the same symbol of "7, 7, 7" (fixed display), a big hit occurs and the guidance device 2020a turns counterclockwise. The spinning and stored game balls are guided to the guidance increasing device operation area 2020b, and the guidance increasing device (described later) operates. Also,
When the game is confirmed and displayed in a mode other than the symbol display mode in the case of the big hit (outside display mode), the guidance device 2020a rotates clockwise, and the stored game balls are guided to the stored ball discharge port 2020c. You.

On the other hand, the accessory guidance device operation gate 2022
Is located above the right half surface side of the center of the game area 2011 and has a switch 2 for detecting the passage of the accessory guidance device operating gate inside.
022a (see FIG. 48). During the occurrence of the special game state, the accessory guiding device operation gate 2022
When the game ball is detected by the detection switch 2022a, the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 2023 is opened.

[0236] Accessory operation port (score increase apparatus operation port) 202
Reference numeral 3 denotes a pair of movable pieces 2023a and 2023b which are disposed below the right half surface of the game area 2011 and are in an open state that is advantageous for the player to enter the ball based on the operation of the movable pieces 2023a and 2023b. In addition, an accessory actuation port entry ball detection switch 2023c (see FIG. 48) is provided inside,
When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 2023c, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry symbol display device 2025 is lit and displayed, and a score increase described later is performed. The device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to dispose an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 2011, and to open the accessory operation port (score increasing device operation port) 2023 based on the operation of the open and close plate.

The 16 consecutive entry ball openings 2024 are located in the game area 201.
1, a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 2025 is provided in front of it.
Each of the 16 consecutive entry ball openings 2024 is provided with 16 consecutive entry ball detection switches 2025a (see FIG. 46), and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 2025a, the entry ball corresponding to the entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 2025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 2001, the launching of 16 game balls is defined as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on the combination of the identification information illuminated and displayed for the 16 games. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. Note that the ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 2025 may be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display.
When a game ball is detected at 025a, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, liquid crystal (LC)
D) The identification information (number) is displayed on the display screen.

Next, regarding the back structure of the pachinko machine 2001, the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 2130 of the pachinko machine 2001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 2130 includes a main control unit 2140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 2 connected to the main control unit 2140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 2160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 2170 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 2180. The main control unit 2140 includes a main control board 2340
And the four control units 21 other than the main control unit 2140
Reference numerals 50, 2160, 2170, and 2180 are respectively configured as sub-control units, and are award control substrates (frame control substrates) 2350, symbol display device control substrates 2360, lamp output device control substrates 2370, and audio output device control substrates, which are sub-control substrates. 2380.

The main control board 2340 is provided with the C control shown in FIG.
A PU 1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 1
480, and controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 2001 (that is, basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area by a control program stored in the ROM 1482. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Referring back to FIG. 46, main control unit 2140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing the sub-control units 2150, 2160, 2170, and 2180 to perform processing. In addition, the main control unit 2140 to each sub control unit 2150,
Data is transmitted to 2160, 2170, and 2180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 2140 to 2180 has a power receiving board 2128 connected to the main power supply 2129.
To the power supply unit 2127 and further to the power supply relay board 21
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 2121.

The main control unit 2140 includes a 16-switch relay board 2031, a relay board 2200, a specific entrance opening detection switch 2021 a, and a frame external terminal board 212.
2. The frame relay board 2200b is connected. The 16 consecutive ball detection switch 2 is provided on the 16 consecutive switch relay board 2031.
025a is connected, and the 16 consecutive ball detection switches 202
The detection signal from 5a is transmitted to main controller 2140.
Note that the main control unit 2140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 2807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 46, on the relay board 2200, as shown in FIG.
8c, guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 2019
a, Character guide device operation gate passage detection switch 2022
a, accessory actuation opening (score increasing device actuation opening) ball entry detection switch 2023c, accessory actuation opening solenoid 2018d, accessory actuation opening (score increasing device activation opening) solenoid 2023d,
The board external terminal board 2032 and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port solenoid 2018d is a solenoid for opening and closing the movable pieces 2018a and 2018b of the accessory actuation port 2018. The accessory actuation port (score increasing device actuation port) solenoid 2023d is provided with a character object actuation port (score increasing device actuation port) 2
023 is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 2023a and 2023b. The board external terminal board 2032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 46, external terminal board for frame 2122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 2104, a door switch 2202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 2150. On the frame relay board 2200b, a supply ball out detecting switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 2150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 2140, and includes a memory clear switch substrate 2191,
Ball lending counting sensor 2192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 2013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 2
194, a CR operation board 2195, a prize ball motor sensor board 2196, a launching apparatus control board 2201 and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 2191 is a switch board for clearing all various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 2192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 2013 for lending a ball. A sensor for counting the number, a prize ball flow switching solenoid 2194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 2109. A CR operation board 2195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards to and from a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 2013. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 2297.

The launching device control board 2201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 46, the symbol display device control unit 216
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor). The arithmetic circuit components are interconnected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 2140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 47, the symbol display device control unit 2160 includes an induction increasing device operation determination symbol display device substrate 2 having a display panel.
017d is connected, and the CPU controls the operation of the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device (display panel) 2017 using the RAM as a work area (that is, the display control of the display device) by the control program stored in the ROM. .
The display control of the incoming symbol display device 2025 is assumed to be performed by the main control unit 2140. However, the display control may be performed by the symbol display device control unit 2160.

Returning to FIG. 46, the lamp output device control unit 21
70 is an arithmetic circuit component (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.) similar to the symbol display device control unit 2160
And the main control unit 21 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 2170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 46, audio output device control section 218
Numeral 0 includes the same arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) as the symbol display device control unit 2160,
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 2140. The same audio relay board 1203 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 2180.
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 2380 are provided with symbol display. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 2160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 2140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 2170 or the sound output device control unit 2180 as an operation command target.

The symbol display device controller 216 described above.
0, the lamp output device control unit 2170 and the audio output device control unit 2180 include a main control unit 2140 and a frame control unit 2150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

The electronic control unit 213 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 2001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 2140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 20
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

As a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG. 31, a judgment symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG.
0) is performed separately. Note that, based on the ball entering the specific entrance 2021 (that is, detection by the specific entrance entrance detection switch 2021a), a similarity determination job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed, and furthermore, a symbol that does not come off The determination random number and the reach mode determination random number are obtained, and the results are stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific entrance 2021, the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 2
In 017, variable display of each symbol (in this case, a three-digit determination symbol) is started. Next, in S622, referring to the pass / fail result obtained in the above-described pass / fail judgment job,
In the case of a hit determination ("1") (S623: YES), S
Proceeding to 632, the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is read, and further proceeding to S633, the jackpot number similarly determined by the random number is read, and proceeding to S631, for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol are made the same symbol. After a predetermined reach display mode after being aligned, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol and the middle symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, where the off-reach symbol number and the off-right symbol number determined by the random numbers are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of the normal deviation determination ("3") (S625), the flow proceeds to S626, where each of the deviation symbol numbers determined by the random numbers is read out, and the flow proceeds to S627, in which the respective determination symbols are mutually shifted. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. It should be noted that, even in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes, such as delaying the variable display time of only one symbol.

The judgment symbol display job (S62)
The display mode determined in 0) is output from the main control unit 2140 to the symbol display device control unit 2160 at a predetermined time interval as corresponding command data (command signal),
The symbol display device control unit 2160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data. The symbol display device control unit 2160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (which can be selected by obtaining a random number or the like), the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 20
17 is controlled by the symbol display device control unit 2160.
Can be performed.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 2001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 2016, the accessory operating port 201
The movable pieces 2018a and 2018b of No. 8 are opened for a predetermined time, for example, 0.3 seconds. When a game ball enters the accessory operation port 2018, the fifth and eighth lights of the entry symbol display device 2025 are lit. No. 5 and No. 8 correspond to the entrances of the 16 consecutive entrances 2024 which are difficult to enter.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the specific entrance 2021, the game ball is stored in the storage section 2020d and a specific entrance detection switch 2021a provided at the bottom of the storage section 2020d (see FIG. 46). ) Detects a game ball, and thereby, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 201 is displayed.
7 starts variable display. And the incoming symbol display device 2
No. 025 is lit. This No. 6 corresponds to a 16-ball entrance 2024 which is difficult to enter. When the symbol is determined and displayed in a specific display mode (hit display mode) on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 2017, the guiding device 2020a places the stored game ball in the guidance increasing device operating area 2020b. Induce. Here, when a game ball enters the guidance increase device operation area 2020b, the guidance increase device (main control unit 2140) operates, and a special game state occurs. This induction augmentation device has a maximum of 14
It is assumed that the operation is continued up to the unit game (14 games), and the number of times of the right is displayed on the right number display device 20 provided substantially at the center of the guiding device 2020a during the generation of the right.
27, the remaining number of rights is displayed at the start of the next unit game (game). In addition, as described above, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 201
In the case where the symbol is determined and displayed in the off-display mode in 7, the guiding device 2020a guides the stored game ball to the stored ball discharge port 2020c.

The game mode according to the normal game state has been described above, and the accessory operation device operation gate 2016 and the accessory operation port 2
018 functions as a gaming device group for the first gaming mode (normal gaming state). In addition, specific entrance 2021, guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 2017, guidance device 2
020a, the guidance increase device operation area 2020b, and the storage ball discharge port 2020c are for the second game mode (for special game generation)
Function as a group of gaming devices.

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 2022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 202
3 is opened for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 2023, the numbers 11, 13, 14, and 15 of the entry symbol display device 2025 are lit and displayed, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The eleventh, thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth correspond to the 16 consecutive entry openings 2024, which are difficult entry openings. Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with the unit game of 14 times as an upper limit, and ends when the unit game reaches 14 times or a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 2020b. Become. Also, except during the operation of the guidance increasing device, the accessory guidance device operating gate 202
Even if the game ball passes through 2, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 2023 is not opened, and the opened accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 202 is further opened.
In the case where there is no ball in 3, the opening is released after three unit games (3 games) including the opened unit games (games) have elapsed, and the accessory operation opening (score increasing device operation opening) 2023.
Is to be closed. In other words, when there is no ball entry, the opening is continued up to three times including the unit game (game) opened. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operation gate 202
2. The accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 2023 is the third
Functioning as a game device group for the game mode (special game state).

As described above, the pachinko machine 20 of the second embodiment is described.
In 01, it is possible to divide various gaming devices into specific groups and enjoy a plurality of gaming modes.
In particular, in the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 2017, if the probability that a specific display mode to be hit is confirmed and displayed is increased, a special game state is easily generated, and a large amount of awards are easily obtained for the player. Become. In addition, by making it easy to guide the game ball to the accessory guiding device operation gate 2016 by an obstacle nail or the like, and to facilitate guiding the game ball to the accessory operating port 2018, the ratio of entering the ball into the accessory operating port 2018 is also reduced. Since the prize is increased, the prize can be easily obtained, and the player's willingness to play in the normal state can be reduced. Also,
It is possible to provide the player with a novel and novel entertainment interest.

As described above, the pachinko machine 20 according to the third embodiment is described.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the 7-segment LE
D or liquid crystal (LCD) can be displayed, and the guiding device is not limited to a rotating body, but may be any device that can guide a game ball to two or more regions, such as a plate-shaped distributing device that swings left and right. .

(Fourth Embodiment) Next, as a fourth embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 3001 as a combination game machine will be described. It should be noted that parts having a configuration different from that of the above-described second embodiment will be described.
It is assumed that it has the same configuration as the embodiment. In this case, the configuration of the game board is mainly different from that of the second embodiment.

The front part of the pachinko machine 3001 according to the fourth embodiment has the same main body frame, middle frame, front frame, and upper plate as the front part of the pachinko machine 1001 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 3 formed on the front part
The surface structure 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 3010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 3010 includes the game board 30
A substantially circular game area 3011 is formed by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the surface 10, and a specific entrance 3021 as a start detection device is provided in the game area 3011. , A symbol display device 3017 as a variable display device and a lottery device, and an accessory actuation device operation gate 3022a, 3022b as an accessory actuation detection device.
And an actuating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 3023 as a variable ball entry device, a 16-port entry ball port 3024 in which 16 entry fields are arranged adjacent to each other, and a 16-port entry ball port 302
4, a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 3025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry region, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided.

The specific entrance 3021 is located in the game area 3011.
Storage unit 3020 as a storage device
d, and a guiding device 3020a that can guide the game balls stored in the storing portion 3020d to the guiding increasing device operating region 3019 as a specific entering ball region. In the case of the present embodiment, the storage device 3020d and the guidance device 3020a are configured as the same game device, function as the storage device 3020d when the game device is inactive, and function as the guidance device 3020a when in operation. It is functioning. Further, a specific entrance detection switch 3021a (see FIG. 51) is provided at the bottom of the storage section 3020d, and based on this detection, the symbol display device 3017 starts variable display of a plurality of symbols. In addition, above the specific entrance 3021, guide members 3027, 3027 for guiding a game ball to the specific entrance 3021, and the guide members 3027, 302.
The obstacle member 3026, which is located above the specific ball entrance 7 and prevents entry of the game ball from just above the specific entrance 3021 for the game ball, is provided.

The guiding device 3020a is a so-called sorting device that is a plate-shaped accessory that can move left and right.
There is provided a concave storage section 3020d that can temporarily store the game ball that has entered the specific entrance 3021. The guidance device 3020a is movable in both left and right directions toward the game board 3010.
At 020d, the stored game balls are guided to the guidance increasing device operation area guiding section 3020b, and when they are moved to the left, the game balls are guided to the stored ball discharge port 3020c. Note that the guidance device 3020a is
When a is not operated, that is, when the symbol display device 3017 is in the variable start waiting state or the variable display state, the game ball receiving state or the guidance waiting state is set.

[0268] The entrance of the specific entrance 3021 is the guidance device 30.
The game ball formed above the entrance 20a and entered from the entrance is stored in the storage unit 3020d of the guidance device 3020a, and thereafter, the guidance increase device operation area guidance unit 3020b
Or, it is guided to any of the stored ball discharge ports 3020c.
The guidance increase device operation area guidance unit 3020b includes the guidance device 3
The game ball provided at the lower right of 020a and having passed through the guidance increasing device operation region guiding portion 3020b is guided to the guidance increasing device operation region 3019. Guidance increase device operation area 3
Reference numeral 019 includes a switch 3019a (see FIG. 53) for detecting the passage of the guidance increase device in the operation area. When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 3019a, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry ball symbol display device 3025 is lit and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is turned on. When activated, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The special game state is a game state in which the prize acquired during the one game (unit game) is doubled, and the game state is continued up to a predetermined number of games.
In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of continuous games is set to either 12 games or 14 games. Note that the guidance increasing device is a special device mainly configured by the main control unit 3140 (see FIG. 51) and changing a game state.

The symbol display device 3017 has a game area 301.
1, three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area 3017a and a middle symbol display area 3017.
b, right symbol display area 3017c. Based on the detection result of the specific entrance detection switch 3021a, a left symbol display area 3017a and a right symbol display area 3017c
Starts variable display as a guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device (hereinafter, also referred to as a first symbol display device) 3217. In the first symbol display device 3217, the left and right display areas 3017a and 3017b are each capable of variably stopping and displaying a plurality of symbols. For example, the symbols are aligned in the same two-digit symbol of "7, 7". When the stop display (confirmation display) is made, a big hit occurs, the guiding device 3020a moves to the right, and the stored game balls are moved from the guiding increasing device operating region guiding portion 3020b to the guiding increasing device operating region 3.
019, and the guidance increasing device (described later) operates. Further, when the final display is performed in a mode other than the symbol display mode in the case of the big hit (outside display mode), the guidance device 3 is displayed.
020a moves to the left, and the stored game balls are guided to the stored ball discharge port 3020c.

When the game ball is guided to the guidance increasing device operation region 3019, the middle symbol display region 3017b is a symbol display device for determining the number of times the guidance increasing device is activated.
Variable display is started as 3317). The second symbol display device 3317 functions as a lottery device for selecting the upper limit of the number of continuations of the special game state, and the upper limit of the number of continuations (12 games or 14 games) based on the symbol that is confirmed and displayed. Is determined.

On the other hand, a gate guidance device operating gate 3022
53a and 3022b are disposed in the center of the game area 3011 and on the right half side from the center, and have therein the accessory guiding device operation gate passage detection switches 3022c and 3022d (FIG. 53).
Reference). During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by any of the detection switches 3022c and 3022d of the accessory guiding device operating gates 3022a and 3022b, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port).
3023 is opened.

[0273] Accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 302
Numeral 3 is disposed on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 3011 and includes a pair of movable pieces 3023a and 3023b. Based on the operation of the movable pieces 3023a and 3023b, the open state is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. In addition, there is provided an accessory entry opening detection switch 3023c (see FIG. 53) therein, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 3023c, predetermined identification information of the entry design display device 3025 (generally difficult to enter). The identification information corresponding to the large ball entry area is lit and displayed, and the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 3011, and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 3023 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

The 16 consecutive entrances 3024 are provided in the game area 301.
1, a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 3025 is provided in front of it.
A 16 consecutive ball detection switch 3025a (see FIG. 51) is provided inside each of the 16 continuous ball entrances 3024, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 3025a, the incoming ball corresponding to the ball entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 3025 is lit and displayed. In the pachinko machine 3001, the launch of 16 game balls is regarded as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on the combination of the identification information lit on the 16 balls. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. The entering symbol display device (identification information display device) 3025 may be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display. In this case, the detection switch 302
When a game ball is detected in 5a, the identification information (number) is displayed on the 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display screen of the entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 3025 corresponding to the entry area. Is displayed.

Next, regarding the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 3001, the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 3130 of the pachinko machine 3001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 3130 includes a main control unit 3140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 3 connected to the main control unit 3140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 3160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 3170 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 3180. The main control unit 3140 includes a main control board 3340
And the above four control units 31 other than the main control unit 3140
50, 3160, 3170, and 3180 are each configured as a sub-control unit, and award control board (frame control board) 3350, symbol display control board 3360, lamp output control board 3370, audio output control board, which are sub-control boards. 3380.

The main control board 3340 is a C control shown in FIG.
A PU 1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 1
A control program stored in the ROM 1482 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 3001 (that is, the basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Returning to FIG. 51, main control unit 3140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing each sub-control unit 3150, 3160, 3170, or 3180 to perform processing. In addition, the main control unit 3140 to each sub control unit 3150,
Data is transmitted to 3160, 3170, and 3180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 3140 to 3180 has a power receiving board 3128 connected to the main power supply 3129.
To the power supply unit 3127 and further to the power supply relay board 31
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 3121.

The main control section 3140 includes a 16-switch relay board 3031, a relay board 3200, a specific entrance detection switch 3021 a, and a frame external terminal board 312.
2. The frame relay board 3200b is connected. The 16 consecutive ball detection switch 3 is provided on the 16 consecutive switch relay board 3031.
025a is connected to the 16 consecutive ball detection switches 302
The detection signal from 5a is transmitted to main control unit 3140.
Note that the main control unit 3140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 3807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 51, as shown in FIG. 53, on the relay board 3200, the guidance increasing device operation area passage detection switch 3019a, the accessory object guidance device operation gate passage detection switches 3022c and 3022d, the accessory operation port (score) Increasing device operating port) ball entry detection switch 3023c, accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) solenoid 3023d, board external terminal board 3032, and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) solenoid 3023d is a movable piece 302 of the accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) 3023.
Solenoid for opening 3a and 3023b.
The board external terminal board 3032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 51, the frame external terminal board 3122
Is connected to the tank ball out detection switch 304, the door switch 3202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 3150. On the frame relay board 3200b, a replenishing ball out detecting switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control section (prize ball control section) 3150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control section 3140, and includes a memory clear switch board 3191,
Ball lending counting sensor 3192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 3013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 3
194, CR operation board 3195, prize ball motor sensor board 3196, launching apparatus control board 3201 and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 3191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on. A sensor for counting the number and a prize ball flow path switching solenoid 3194 are solenoids for switching the flow paths for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 3109. A CR operation board 3195 is a board for inputting / outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards with a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 3013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 3196 relates to a prize ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 3297.

The launching device control board 3201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 51, the symbol display device control unit 316
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor), and these arithmetic circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 3140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 52, a symbol display device substrate 3017d including a display panel is connected to the symbol display device control unit 3160,
The CPU executes R by the control program stored in the ROM.
Symbol display device (display panel) 30 using AM as a work area
17 (ie, display control of the display device). The display control of the incoming symbol display device 3025 is assumed to be performed by the main control unit 3140, but the display control may be performed by the symbol display device control unit 3160.

Returning to FIG. 51, the lamp output device control unit 31
70 is the same arithmetic circuit component (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.) as the symbol display device control unit 3160
And a main control unit 31 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 3170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 51, audio output device control section 318
Numeral 0 includes the same arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) as the symbol display device control unit 3160,
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 3140. An audio relay board 1203 similar to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 3180,
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 3380 are provided with a symbol display. The pattern is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of the reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 3160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 3140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 3170 or the sound output device control unit 3180 as an operation command target.

The symbol display device control section 316 described above is used.
0, the lamp output device control unit 3170 and the audio output device control unit 3180 include a main control unit 3140 and a frame control unit 3150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

The electronic control unit 313 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 3001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 3140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 30
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

As a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG. 31, the first symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG.
0) is performed separately. In addition, based on the ball entering the specific entrance 3021 (that is, detection by the specific entrance detection switch 3021a), a similarity determination job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed, and furthermore, a symbol that does not come off The determination random number and the reach mode determination random number are obtained, and the results are stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, based on the passing of the game ball to the specific entrance 3021, the first symbol display device 3217 of the symbol display device 3017 starts variable display of each symbol (in this case, a two digit hit / fail judgment symbol). Let it. Next, S62
In step S2, the hit / fail judgment result obtained in the hit / fail judgment job is referred to, and in the case of a hit judgment ("1") (S623: YE
S), the process proceeds to S632, the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is read, and further, the process proceeds to S633, and the jackpot number similarly determined by the random number is read.
In step 31, for example, a symbol corresponding to a hit symbol (in this embodiment, “3” and “7” of numbers “1” to “9”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 3017 a, and the right symbol display is performed. After passing through the predetermined reach display mode in the area 3017c, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation determination ("2") (S625), the flow advances to S626 to read out each symbol number determined by the random number, and the flow advances to S627 to shift each symbol to each other. Stop display at the timing and confirm. It should be noted that also in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes such as delaying the variable display time of the right symbol.

The display mode determined in such a symbol display job (S620) is output as corresponding command data (command signal) from the main control unit 3140 to the symbol display device control unit 3160 at a predetermined time interval. Then, the symbol display device control unit 3160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data.
The symbol display device control unit 3160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), the display control in the first symbol display device 3217 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 3160.

Further, a game job (S600) in FIG.
As a subroutine, a second symbol display job (S640) shown in FIG. 55 is separately performed. In the second symbol display job (S640), first, in S642, the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 3019a (FIG. 5)
3), and if the switch 3019a detects a signal, a random number for determining the number of continuations is acquired at the same time as the detection in S644, and a random number for the second symbol display mode is acquired in S646. Then, the display mode of the symbol in the second symbol display device 3317 (for example, the symbol is a number from “1” to “9”) is determined based on the obtained random numbers, and the display command signal is transmitted to the main control unit 3140.
(See FIG. 51) from the symbol display device control unit 3160 (FIG. 5).
1).

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 3001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When a game ball enters the specific entrance 3021, the game ball is stored in the storage unit 3020d (the guidance device 3020a) and the storage unit 3020d.
Specific entrance detection switch 3 provided at the bottom of 20d
When the game symbol 021a (see FIG. 51) detects a game ball, the first symbol display device 3217 starts variable display.
In the first symbol display device 3217, when the symbol is definitely displayed in a specific display mode (hit display mode), the guidance device 3020a guides the game ball to the guidance increase device operation area guidance portion 3020b, and the game ball is displayed. Guidance increase device operation area 3
Pass through 019. Here, when the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 3019a detects a game ball, the second symbol display device 3317 starts variable display, the guidance increase device (main control unit 3140) operates, and the special game state is set. appear. On the basis of the symbols “1” to “9” confirmed and displayed on the second symbol display device 3317, the maximum number of times the guidance increasing device operates is determined, for example, “3”,
When it is confirmed and displayed at "7", the maximum number of continuations is 14 times, and in the case of other symbols, the maximum number of continuations is 12 times. As described above, the first symbol display device 3217
In the case where the symbols are confirmed and displayed in the off display mode, the guiding device 3020a transfers the game balls to the stored ball discharge port 302.
0c. Further, the number of times the guidance increasing device is operated can be displayed on the second symbol display device 3317 during the generation of the right, and the remaining number of rights is displayed at the start of the next unit game (game) from the next time. It can be. In this case, after the number determination symbol is finally displayed on the second symbol display device 3317, the number of continuations can be displayed, and the second symbol display device 3317 has a function as a right count display device. It will be. In addition,
The number-of-rights display device can be provided separately from the second symbol display device 3317, for example, on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 3011.

The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, the specific entrance 3021, the storage unit (storage device) 302.
0d, the first symbol display device (guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device) 3217, the guidance device 3020a, and the second symbol display device (guidance increase device operation count determination symbol display device (lottery device)) 3317 are the first game mode. It functions as a gaming device group for (normal gaming state). Note that the first game mode gaming device group can be regarded as a special game generating game device group for generating a special game state.

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, the game ball is operated by the accessory guidance device operating gate 3022.
a, 3022b, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 3023 is opened for a predetermined time.
When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 3023, the eleventh and thirteenth of the entry symbol display device 3025 are displayed.
The numbers 14, 14 and 15 are illuminated and the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled. This one
Numbers 1, 13, 14, and 15 are 16 consecutive entrances 302
It corresponds to 4 entrances that are relatively difficult to enter. Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with the unit game of 12 or 14 times as an upper limit, and whether the unit game reaches 12 or 14 times, or whether the game ball passes through the guidance increasing device operation area 3019. Either ends. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guidance device operation gates 3022a and 3022b and the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 3023 are a game apparatus for the second game mode (special game state). It functions as a group.

As described above, the pachinko machine 300 of the present embodiment is described.
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, since the symbol display device 3017 includes the first symbol display device 3217 for performing the hit determination and the second symbol display device 3317 for determining the maximum number of times of the special game state, a novel novel configuration of the gaming device. Configuration. In addition, since the maximum number of times the special game state is continued is randomly selected on the second symbol display device 3317 after a hit, it is possible to give the player a novel game interest that has never been seen before.

As described above, the pachinko machine 30 according to the fourth embodiment is described.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the symbol display device has 7 segment LED and liquid crystal (LC
The display according to D) is possible, and the guiding device is not limited to the plate-like sorting device that moves to the left and right, but may be any device that can guide a game ball such as a rotating body to two or more areas. Further, in the present embodiment, in the symbol display device, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device (first symbol display device) and the guidance increasing device operation frequency determination symbol display device (second symbol display device) are integrally provided. However, it is also possible to dispose each of these symbol display devices separately in the game area.

(Fifth Embodiment) Next, as a fifth embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 4001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The front portion of the pachinko machine 4001 according to the fifth embodiment has the same main body frame, middle frame, front frame, and upper plate portion as the front portion of the pachinko machine 1001 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 4 formed on the front part
The surface structure of 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 4010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 4010 includes a game board 40
A substantially circular game area 4011 is formed by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the surface 10, and in the game area 4011, the operation of the accessory guiding device as a specific detection device is performed. Gates 4016a, 4016b, 40
16c, an accessory operation port (specific entry port) 4020 as a first variable entry device, a guidance increasing device actuation frequency determination symbol display device (hereinafter also simply referred to as a symbol display device) 4017 as a lottery device, An actor guidance device actuation gate 4022 as an accessory actuation detection device, an accessory actuation port (score increasing device actuation port) 4023 as a second variable ball entry device, 16
16 consecutive entry ports 4 in which the entry areas are arranged adjacent to each other
024, a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 4025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry area of the 16 consecutive ball entrances 4024, and a number of obstacle nails (not shown) and the like. ing.

[0301] The accessory guidance device operation gates 4016a to 4016
16c are arranged on the left half surface side from the center of the game area 4011, and each has an accessory guiding device operation gate passage detection switch 4016d (see FIG. 59) inside. When a game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 4016d, the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 4020 is opened.

The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 4020 is arranged substantially at the center of the game area 4011 and has a pair of movable pieces 40.
21a and 4021b. The movable piece 4021a,
4021b can be opened and closed left and right, and based on the detection of the game ball by the passage detection switch 4016d (see FIG. 59), it is opened left and right for a predetermined time by the accessory actuation port solenoid 4021c (see FIG. 59). An opening / closing plate that can be opened / closed in the forward direction of the game area 4011 is provided, and the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 402 based on the operation of the opening / closing plate.
It is also possible to set 0 to the open state.

[0303] The accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 4020 includes:
A guiding portion 4026 capable of temporarily rolling the entered game ball, a guidance increasing device operating region 4020b as a specific entering ball region, and a guidance increasing device non-operating region 4020c as a non-specific entering ball region. Is provided. Guiding part 4
Reference numeral 026 denotes each of the operation areas 4020b, 4020c, 402
0c, formed before the entrance of each of the operating areas 4020b,
4020c and 4020c form a guide path that is inclined. The game ball rolled in the guidance section 4026, which is the guidance path, enters one of the guidance increase device operation area 4020b and the guidance increase device non-operation area 4020c.

The guidance increasing device operating area 4020b is provided between the two guiding increasing device non-operating areas 4020c and 4020c, and includes an induction increasing device operating area passage detection switch 4019a (see FIG. 59). When the detection switch 4019a detects a game ball that has passed the guidance increasing device operation area 4020b, the entering symbol display device 4
The predetermined identification information of No. 025 (identification information generally corresponding to the entry area where entry is difficult) is illuminated and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is activated to generate a special game state advantageous to the player. The special game state is a game state in which the prize acquired during the one game (unit game) is doubled, and the game state is continued up to a predetermined number of games. The number of continuous games in the special game state is determined based on a symbol displayed on the symbol increase display device 4017 of the guidance increasing device as a lottery device disposed below the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 4020. In the present embodiment, the upper limit is one of one game, two games, and fourteen games. This guidance increasing device actuation frequency judgment symbol device 4017
Starts variable display based on the detection of the detection switch 4019a, and is stopped (determined) after a predetermined variable display mode. The guidance increasing device is a special device mainly configured by the main control unit 4140 (see FIG. 57) and changing a game state.

[0305] On the other hand, the accessory guidance device operation gate 4022
Is arranged on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 4011,
Inside the accessory guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 402
2a (see FIG. 59). During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 4022a of the operation guidance device operation gate 4022, the operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 4023 is opened.

[0306] Accessory opening (score increasing device opening) 402
Numeral 3 is disposed on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 4011 and includes a pair of movable pieces 4023a and 4023b. Based on the operation of the movable pieces 4023a and 4023b, the open state is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. In addition, there is provided an accessory entry opening ball detection switch 4023c (see FIG. 59) therein, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 4023c, predetermined identification information of the entry symbol display device 4025 (generally difficult to enter). The identification information corresponding to the large ball entry area is lit and displayed, and the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 4011, and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 4023 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

[0307] The 16 consecutive entry ports 4024 are provided in the game area 401.
1, a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 4025 is provided in front of it.
Each of the 16 consecutive entry ball openings 4024 is provided with 16 consecutive entry ball detection switches 4025a (see FIG. 57), and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 4025a, the entry ball corresponding to the entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 4025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 4001, the launch of 16 game balls is regarded as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on a combination of the identification information lit in the 16 balls. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. The entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 4025 may be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display. In this case, the detection switch 402
When a game ball is detected in 5a, the identification information (number) is displayed on a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display screen of a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 4025 corresponding to the ball entry area. Is displayed.

Next, regarding the back structure of the pachinko machine 4001, the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, an electronic control unit 4130 of the pachinko machine 4001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 4130 includes a main control unit 4140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 4 connected to the main control unit 4140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 4160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 4170 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 4180. The main control unit 4140 includes a main control board 4340
And the above four control units 41 other than the main control unit 4140
50, 4160, 4170, and 4180 are each configured as a sub-control unit, and are a prize ball control board (frame control board) 4350, a symbol display device control board 4360, a lamp output device control board 4370, and an audio output device control board, which are sub-control boards. 4380.

The main control board 4340 has the C
A PU 1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 1
480, and controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 4001 (that is, basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area by a control program stored in the ROM 1482. In addition, the CPU 1401 mainly performs the judgment control in the symbol display for judging the number of times of operation of the guidance increasing device by the symbol judgment program stored in the ROM 1482 (symbol judgment means).

Referring back to FIG. 57, main control unit 4140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing the sub-control units 4150, 4160, 4170, and 4180 to perform processing. In addition, the main control unit 4140 to each sub control unit 4150,
Data is transmitted to 4160, 4170, and 4180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 4140 to 4180 has a power receiving board 4128 connected to the main power supply 4129.
From the power supply unit 4127 and further from the power supply relay board 41
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 4121.

The main controller 4140 is connected to a 16-switch relay board 4031, a relay board 4200, an external terminal board for frame 4122, and a frame relay board 4200b. The 16-connection ball detection switch 4025a is connected to the 16-connection switch relay board 4031. The detection signal from the 16-connection ball detection switch 4025a is transmitted to the main control unit 4140. Note that the main control section 4140 is provided with an information output section for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 4807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 57, as shown in FIG. 59, the relay board 4200 includes, as shown in FIG. 59, an accessory gate operation gate passage detection switch 4016d (three operation gates 4016a to 4016a-40).
16c (see FIG. 56), a guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 4019a, a character guidance device activation gate passage detection switch 4022a, a character entry opening (score increase device activation opening) ball entry detection switch 402
Reference numeral 3c, an accessory operating port solenoid 4021c, an accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) solenoid 4023d, an external board terminal board 4032, and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port solenoid 4021c is provided in the accessory actuation port (specific ball entry port) 40.
A solenoid for opening the 20 movable pieces 4021a and 4021b. Actuator opening (scoring device activation opening)
The solenoid 4023d is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 4023a and 4023b of the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 4023. External terminal board 403 for panel
Reference numeral 2 denotes a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 57, frame external terminal board 4122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 4104, a door switch 4202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 4150. On the frame relay board 4200b, a supply ball out detection switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 4150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 4140, and includes a memory clear switch substrate 4191,
Ball lending counting sensor 4192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 4013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 4
194, a CR operation board 4195, a prize ball motor sensor board 4196, a launching apparatus control board 4201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 4191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 4192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 4013 to lend the ball lent. A sensor for counting the number, the prize ball flow switching solenoid 4194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 4109. A CR operation board 4195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as a ball lending and the number of remaining cards to and from a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 4013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 4196 relates to prize ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 4297.

The launching device control board 4201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 4 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 4093, a launch ball count switch 4094, a launch stop switch 4009b, and a launch handle 4009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 57, the symbol display device control unit 416
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor), and these arithmetic circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 4140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 58, the symbol display device control unit 4160 is connected to a symbol display device board 4017d for determining the number of times of operation of the guidance increasing device provided with a display panel. Symbol display device (display panel) 401
7 (ie, display control of the display device). The display control of the incoming symbol display device 4025 is assumed to be performed by the main control unit 4140, but the display control may be performed by the symbol display device control unit 4160.

Returning to FIG. 57, the lamp output device control section 41
70 is the same arithmetic circuit component as the symbol display device control unit 4160 (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.)
And the main control unit 41 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 4170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 57, audio output device control section 418
Numeral 0 includes arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) similar to the symbol display device control unit 4160.
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 4140. An audio relay board 1203 similar to that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 4180.
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the first embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 4380 are provided with a symbol display. The pattern is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 4160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 4140 as a command signal that targets the lamp output device control unit 4170 or the sound output device control unit 4180 as an operation command target.

Note that the above-described symbol display device control unit 416
0, the lamp output device control unit 4170 and the audio output device control unit 4180 include the main control unit 4140 and the frame control unit 4150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Next, the electronic control unit 413 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 4001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 4140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 40
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

As a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG. 31, a symbol display job for determining the number of operations shown in FIG. 60 (S640) is separately performed. In this symbol display job for determining the number of times of operation (S640), first, S642
In the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 40
19a (see FIG. 59).
If a detection is made in step 9a, a random number for determining the number of times of operation is acquired at the same time as the detection in step S644.
At 646, a random number for symbol display for actuation number determination is obtained. The display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 4017 is determined based on the obtained random numbers, and the display command signal is transmitted from the main control unit 4140 (see FIG. 57) to the symbol display device control unit 4160 (see FIG. 57). Is done.

The display mode determined by such a symbol display job (S640) is output from the main control unit 4140 to the symbol display device control unit 4160 at a predetermined time interval as corresponding command data (command signal). Then, the symbol display device control unit 4160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data.
The symbol display device control unit 4160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), the display control in the symbol display device 4017 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 4160.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 4001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through any of the accessory guiding device operating gates 4016a to 4016c, the accessory operating port (specific entrance) 4020 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It should be noted that the above-mentioned accessory guiding device operating gates 4016a to 4016c do not function while the accessory operating port (specific entrance) 4020 is open (operating).

[0327] When a game ball enters the special object operation port (specific ball entry port) 4020, the game ball passes through the guiding section 4026, and is directed to one of the guidance increasing device operating region 4020b and the guidance increasing device non-operating region 4020c or 4020c. Enter the ball. Here, when a ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 4020b and a game ball is detected by the guidance increasing device operating area passage detection switch 4019a (see FIG. 59), the symbol display device 40 is activated.
17 starts variable display, the guidance increasing device (main control unit 4140) operates, and a special game state occurs.
Based on the symbols “1” to “9” that are definitely displayed on the symbol display device 4017, the maximum number of times that the guidance increasing device operates is determined. The maximum number of times of continuation is two when the final display is performed with "3", and the maximum number of times is one when the final display is performed with other symbols.

The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, and the accessory guiding device operation gates 4016a to 4016
c, character object operation port (specific entrance) 4020, symbol display device (guidance increase device operation number determination symbol display device (lottery device)) 4017 is a game device group for the first game mode (normal game state) It is functioning. Note that the first game mode gaming device group can be regarded as a special game generating game device group for generating a special game state.

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 4022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 402.
3 is opened for a predetermined time. The opening time is the symbol display device 40
Depending on the symbol displayed at 17, the symbol "7" is opened for 5.0 seconds, and the other symbols are opened for 0.3 seconds.
When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 4023, the numbers 9 and 10 of the entry symbol display device 4025 are displayed.
Numbers 11, 11 and 14 are illuminated and the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled. This 9
No. 10, No. 11 and No. 14 are 16 consecutive entry ports 4024
It corresponds to the entrance which is relatively difficult to enter. Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with one, two, or fourteen unit games as the upper limit, and the unit game reaches the upper limit number of times, or the game ball is moved to the guidance increasing device operating area 402.
The process is terminated by either passing through 0b. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operating gate 4022 and the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 4023 are a game device group for the second game mode (special game state). It is functioning.

As described above, the pachinko machine 400 of the present embodiment is used.
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, a symbol display device for determining the maximum number of times the special game state is continued (guidance increase device operation number determination symbol display device) 401.
Since the game device 7 is provided, the game device has a novel configuration that has never been seen before. In addition, the guidance increase device operation area 4020b
After the game ball enters the game, the maximum number of times the special game state is continued in the symbol display device (guidance increasing device actuation number determination symbol display device) 4017 is determined by lottery. Can be provided.

Next, a modification of the structure of the game board 4010 in the pachinko machine 4001 will be described with reference to FIG. The game device group for the first game mode includes a guidance increasing device operation gate 4916, and a bonus item operation port (specific ball entry port) (first variable ball entry apparatus) 4920. When the game ball passes through the guidance increase device operation gate 4916, the movable pieces 4921a and 4921 of the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 4920
b opens right and left and is opened. A guide portion 4926 similar to that of the above-described embodiment is provided at the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 4920.
, A guidance increasing device operation region 4920b, and a guidance increasing device non-operation region 4920c, 4920c.

[0332] The game ball is used as an accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 492.
When the ball enters 0 and passes through the guidance increasing device operation area 4920b, the guidance increasing device operates and a special game state occurs.
Further, the passing of the guidance increase device activation number determination symbol display device 4917 is activated, and the maximum operation number of the guidance increase device is determined based on the symbol fixedly displayed on the symbol display device 4917. The symbol display device 4917 is provided integrally with the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 4920, and is provided below (directly below) the guidance increasing apparatus operation area 4020b. The symbols displayed on the symbol display device 4917 are “1” to
"9", the maximum number of operations in the case of "7" is 14,
In the case of "3", the maximum number of operations is two, and in the case of other symbols, the maximum number of operations is one.

[0333] The gaming machine group for the second gaming mode is provided with a bonus object guidance device operation gate 4922 and a bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) (second variable ball entry device) 4923. . During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 4922, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 492.
When the game ball 3 is opened for a predetermined period of time and a game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increasing device operation port) 4923, a predetermined number lamp (relatively on The number lamp corresponding to the ball entry area 4024 where the ball is difficult is lit and displayed, and the game (unit game)
The points earned during the game will be doubled. Here, the accessory operation port (score increase apparatus operation port) 4923 is provided in the game area 4011.
Approximately at the center of the character, and the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 4920
It is arranged below. The opening time of the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 4923 is determined by the symbol display device 49.
For example, when the display is fixed at "7", the display is opened for 5.0 seconds, and when the display is finalized with another design, the display is opened for 0.4 seconds. It should be noted that when a game ball enters the opened accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 4923, the operation (opening) is terminated.

The guidance increasing device is constituted by the main control unit 4140 (see FIG. 57), similarly to the above embodiment, during which the game ball passes through the guidance increasing device operating area 4920b or the guidance increasing device is turned on. When the operation is continued up to the maximum number of times determined by the symbol displayed on the symbol display device 4017, the operation is terminated.

In the configuration of such a modified example, since the guidance increasing device actuation number determination symbol display device 4917 is integrated with the accessory actuation port (specific entrance) 4920, the game area can be effectively used. In addition, since the symbol display device 4917 is provided immediately below the guidance increasing device operation region 4020b, it is easy to recognize the symbol display device 4917 that operates when a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation region 4020b, and even for a game beginner. The game content becomes relatively easy to understand. In other words, the center of the game is the guidance increase device operation area 4020b and the symbol display device 4917, which are integrally and adjacently arranged.
Notable points in the game are easy to understand.

As described above, the pachinko machine 40 according to the fifth embodiment is described.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device.

(Sixth Embodiment) Next, as a sixth embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 5001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The front portion of the pachinko machine 5001 according to the sixth embodiment has a main body frame, a middle frame, a front frame, and an upper plate similar to those of the front portion of the pachinko machine 5001 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 5 formed on the front part
The surface structure 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 5010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 5010 includes the game board 50
A substantially circular game area 5011 is formed by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the game device 10. A gate 5016, an accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 as a first variable entry device, a guidance increase device as a storage device or a guidance device, an operation area guidance device 5028, and a guidance increase device as a variable display device. An actuation determination symbol display device 5017, an actor guidance device actuation gate 5022 as an accessory actuation detection device, and an accessory actuation opening (score increasing device actuation opening) 502 as a second variable ball entry device.
3 and 16 in which 16 entry areas are arranged adjacent to each other
A ball entry port 5024, a ball entry pattern display device (identification information display device) 5025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry area of the 16 ball entry ports 5024, a large number of obstacle nails (not shown), etc. Are arranged.

The accessory guiding device operation gate 5016 is disposed on the left half side from the center of the game area 5011, and has a accessory guiding device operation gate passage detection switch 5016a (see FIG. 65) inside. This passage detection switch 501
When a game ball is detected in 6a, the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 is opened.

An accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 5020 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 5011, and includes a pair of movable pieces 5021a and 5021b that operate based on the detection result of the passage detection switch 5016a. . Based on the operation of the pair of movable pieces 5021a and 5021b, the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 enters an open state that is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. Further, a guide port 5026a for guiding the game ball that has entered inside to the guide increase device operating area guide device 5028 is provided. Further, a game ball path (guidance gutter) 5026 between the guidance port 5026a of the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 and the guidance increase device operation area guidance device 5028 is formed on the back side of the game board 5010. I have. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 5011, and to open the accessory operating port (specific ball entrance) 5020 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

Guidance increase device operation area Guidance device (also simply referred to as guidance device) 5028 is disposed on the left half side from the center of game area 5011, and is a storage section for temporarily storing game balls guided from guidance gutter 5026. (Storage device) 5029
And a rotating body 5030 which is a so-called distribution device. In addition, a specific entrance entrance detection switch 5027 is provided at the exit of the storage unit 5029, and based on this detection, a guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 described later.
Operates. The rotating body 5030 is a game board 5010.
When the game ball dropped from the storage portion 5029 enters the concave portion 5028a provided in the rotating body 5030 and rotates counterclockwise, the game ball moves to the guidance increasing device operation area 5028b. When the ball is guided and rotated clockwise, the game ball is guided to the stored ball discharge port 5028c. In addition, the rotating body 5030 is
At the time of non-operation of 028, that is, while the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 is in the variable start waiting state or the variable display state, the game ball receiving state or the guidance waiting state is set.

The game balls stored in the storage section 5029 of the guiding device 5028 are guided by the rotating body 5030 to either the guidance increasing device operating area 5028b or the stored ball discharge port 5028c. Guidance increase device operation area 5028
b is provided at the lower left of the guidance device 5028, and inside the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 5019a (FIG. 6).
5). When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 5019a, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where ball entry is generally difficult) of the ball entry symbol display device 5025 is lit and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is turned on. When activated, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The special game state is a game state in which a prize obtained during one game (unit game) is doubled, and the game state is continued up to a predetermined number of games (up to 14 times in the present embodiment). . In addition, the above-mentioned guidance increasing device is a main control unit 4140.
(Refer to FIG. 63) is a special device mainly configured to change a game state.

Indication increase device operation determination symbol display device 501
Reference numeral 7 is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 5011 and includes three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area 5017a, a middle symbol display area 5017b, and a right symbol display area 5017c. The specific entrance detection switch 5027 (FIG. 63)
) Based on the detection result of each symbol display area 5017a.
5017c starts variable display. In the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5017, each display area 50
17a to 5017c are each capable of variably stopping and displaying a plurality of symbols. For example, when the symbol is "7,
Stop display (fixed display) with three digits of the same symbol of "7, 7"
Then, a big hit occurs, the rotating body 5030 rotates counterclockwise, the game ball in the concave portion 5028a is guided to the guidance increasing device operation area 5028b, and the guidance increasing device (described later) operates. In addition, when the final display is performed in a mode other than the symbol display mode in the case of the big hit (outside display mode), the rotating body 5030 rotates clockwise, and the game ball is guided to the stored ball discharge port 5028c.

On the other hand, the operation guide gate 5022 for the accessory guiding device
Is disposed at the center of the game area 5011 and on the right half side from the center, and has a switch 5022a (see FIG. 65) for detecting the passage of the accessory guidance device operating gate inside. During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 5022a of the accessory guiding device operating gate 5022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 5023 is opened.

[0345] Accessory opening (score increasing device opening) 502
Reference numeral 3 denotes an open / close plate 50 which is disposed on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 5011 and can be opened and closed in the front direction of the game area 5011.
23a, based on the operation of the open / close plate 5023a,
An open state is obtained which is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. In addition, a ball entry opening (scoring device activation opening) entrance detection switch 5023c (see FIG. 65) is provided inside, and the detection switch 50
When a game ball is detected at 23c, the incoming ball symbol display device 50
Twenty-five pieces of predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is difficult) are illuminated and displayed, and the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) is activated. In addition, a pair of movable pieces are arranged in the accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 5023, and based on the operation (opening) of the movable pieces to the left and right, the accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port). It is also possible to make 5023 open.

The 16 consecutive entry ports 5024 are provided in the game area 501.
1, a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 5025 is provided in front of it.
Each of the 16 consecutive entry ball openings 5024 is provided with a 16 consecutive entry ball detection switch 5025a (see FIG. 63). When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 5025a, the entry ball corresponding to the entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 5025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 5001, the launch of 16 game balls is regarded as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on a combination of the identification information lit in the 16 balls. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. The entering symbol display device (identification information display device) 5025 may be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display. In this case, the detection switch 502
When a game ball is detected in 5a, the identification information (number) is displayed on a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display screen of a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 5025 corresponding to the ball entry area. Is displayed.

Next, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 5001 will be described with reference to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 5130 of the pachinko machine 5001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 5130 includes a main control unit 5140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 5 connected to the main control unit 5140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 5160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 5170 and a sound output device control unit (sound control unit) 5180. The main control unit 5140 includes a main control board 5340
And the above four control units 51 other than the main control unit 5140
50, 5160, 5170, and 5180 are each configured as a sub-control unit, and award control board (frame control board) 5350, symbol display device control board 5360, lamp output device control board 5370, audio output device control board, which are sub-control boards 5380.

The main control board 5340 has the C
A PU 1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 1
480, and controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 5001 (that is, basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area by a control program stored in the ROM 1482. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Referring back to FIG. 63, main control unit 5140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, to each of sub-control units 5150, 5160, 5170, and 5180 to instruct processing contents. In addition, the main control unit 5140 to each sub control unit 5150,
Data is transmitted to 5160, 5170, and 5180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 5140 to 5180 has a power receiving board 5128 connected to the main power supply 5129.
From the power supply unit 5127 and further from the power supply relay board 51
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 5121.

The main control unit 5140 has a 16-switch relay board 5031, a relay board 5200, a specific entrance detection switch 5027, a frame external terminal board 5122,
The frame relay board 5200b is connected. A 16-connection ball detection switch 502 is provided on the 16-connection switch relay board 5031.
5a is connected, and the 16 consecutive ball detection switches 5025a
Is transmitted to the main control unit 5140. Note that the main control unit 5140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 5807 outside the gaming machine. In particular,
The configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 63, as shown in FIG. 65, on the relay board 5200, a switch 5016a for detecting the passage of the accessory guidance device, a switch 5019a for detecting the passage of the guidance increase device, and a detection gate for detecting the passage of the accessory guidance device. Switch 5022a, Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) ball entry detection switch 5023c, Accessory operation port (specific entry port)
Solenoid 5021c, accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) solenoid 5023d, panel external terminal board 5032
Etc. are connected. The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) solenoid 5021c is provided with a special object operation port (specific entry port) 5020.
Is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 5021a and 5021b. The accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) solenoid 5023d is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 5023a and 5023b of the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 5023. Panel external terminal board 5032
Is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Referring back to FIG. 63, frame external terminal board 5122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 5104, a door switch 5202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 5150. On the frame relay board 5200b, a supply ball out detection switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 5150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 5140, and includes a memory clear switch board 5191,
Ball lending counting sensor 5192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 5013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 5
194, CR operation board 5195, prize ball motor sensor board 5196, launching apparatus control board 5201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 5191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on. A sensor for counting the number, a prize ball flow switching solenoid 5194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 5109. A CR operation board 5195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as a ball lending and the number of remaining cards to and from the CR unit (prepaid card unit) 5013. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 5297.

The launching device control board 5201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 63, symbol display device control section 516
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor). These operation circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 5140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 64, the symbol display device control unit 5160 is connected to a determination symbol display device substrate 5017d having a display panel, and the CPU operates the guidance increasing device by using the control program stored in the ROM with the RAM as a work area. The operation control of the judgment symbol display device (display panel) 5017 (that is, the display control of the display device) is performed. Although the main controller 5140 controls the display of the incoming symbol display device 5025, the display control can be performed by the symbol display device controller 5160.

Returning to FIG. 63, lamp output device control unit 51
70 is the same arithmetic circuit component (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.) as the symbol display device control unit 5160
And the main control unit 51 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 5170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 63, audio output device control section 518
Numeral 0 includes the same arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) as the symbol display device control unit 5160,
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 5140. The same audio relay board 1203 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 5180,
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the first embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 5380 are provided with a symbol display. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 5160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 5140 as a command signal that targets the lamp output device control unit 5170 or the sound output device control unit 5180 as an operation command target.

The symbol display device controller 516 described above.
0, the lamp output device control unit 5170 and the audio output device control unit 5180 include the main control unit 5140 and the frame control unit 5150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Note that the electronic control unit 513 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 5001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 5140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 50
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

As a subroutine of the game job (S600) shown in FIG. 31, a judgment symbol display job (S620) shown in FIG. 66 is separately performed. In addition, based on the ball entry into the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 (that is, detection by the specific entry port entry detection switch 5027), a similarity determination job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed. Then, the random number for symbol determination and the random number for reach mode determination are obtained, and the results are stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, each symbol (in this case, a three-digit hit / fail determination symbol) is changed in the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 based on the passage of the game ball through the accessory actuation port (specific entrance opening) 5020. Start the display. Next, in S622, referring to the success / failure result obtained in the success / failure determination job, in the case of hit determination ("1") (S623: YES), the process proceeds to S632, and the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is determined. And then proceeds to S633, reads a jackpot number similarly determined by random numbers, and proceeds to S631, for example, in the left symbol display area 5017a, a symbol corresponding to a winning symbol (in the present embodiment, a numeral "1" to "3" and "7" of "9" are displayed, and the right symbol display area 5017c is displayed.
After passing through a predetermined reach display mode, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

On the other hand, in the case of the out-of-reach reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, in which the out-of-reach reach symbol number and the out-of-right symbol number determined by the random numbers are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode memory previously stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36). And read out the reach mode data. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, a symbol corresponding to the hit symbol is displayed in the left symbol display region 5017a, and after a predetermined reach display mode is passed in the right symbol display region 5017c, the right symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol different from the left symbol to confirm. Let it.

In the case of the normal deviation judgment ("3") (S625), the flow advances to S626 to read out each symbol number determined by the random number, and the flow advances to S627 to shift each symbol to each other. Stop display at the timing and confirm. It should be noted that also in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes such as delaying the variable display time of the right symbol.

The display mode determined by such a symbol display job (S620) is output from the main control unit 5140 to the symbol display device control unit 5160 at a predetermined time interval as corresponding command data (command signal). Then, the symbol display device control unit 5160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data.
The symbol display device control unit 5160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), the display control in the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 5160.

[0367] In the pachinko machine 5001 of the present embodiment, based on the type of the symbol stopped and displayed on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 by the big hit determination,
After the end of the special game state, there is provided a probability changing means for changing (improving) the probability (small hit probability) of the symbol hit determination until the next big hit. Specifically, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in advance is configured from a random number value for probability change and a random number value for non-probability change, and a symbol for probability change (for example, "7, 7, 7]) or a symbol for non-probability change (for example," 2, 2, 2 ") is stopped and displayed when the symbol for probability change is stopped and displayed, after the end of the special game state. The probability of the success / failure determination (big hit probability) is improved to about 4 to 5 times the normal hit until the next big hit.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 5001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the role-guidance device operation gate 5016, the entrance of the role-effect operation port (specific ball entrance) 5020 has a relatively low jackpot probability (acceptance probability) of the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5017. It is opened for 0.5 seconds in the case of probability, and 5.8 seconds in the case of relatively high probability (so-called probable change). However, during the operation of the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 5020, the accessory guidance device operation gate 5016 does not function. The game ball that has entered the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 5020 is temporarily stored in the storage section 5029, falls, is detected by the specific entry port entry detection switch 5027, and
It enters the concave portion 5028a of the rotating body 5030. When the specific entrance detection switch 5027 detects a game ball, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 5017 starts variable display. Guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5
In 017, when the symbol is confirmed and displayed in a specific display mode (hit display mode), the guidance device 5028 guides the game ball to the guidance increase device operation region 5028b, and the guidance increase device operation region passage detection switch 5019a ( Fig. 65
When the game ball is detected in (refer to), the guidance increasing device (main control unit 5140) is operated, and a special game state is generated.
Note that, when the symbol is determined and displayed in the deviated display mode on the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5017, the guidance device 5028 guides the game ball to the stored ball discharge port 5028c.

The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, in which the accessory guiding device operating gate 5016, the accessory operating port (specific entrance opening) 5020, the guidance increasing device operation determining symbol display device 5017, and the guiding device 5028 are provided. It functions as a gaming device group for the first gaming mode (normal gaming state).
Note that these first game mode gaming device groups can be regarded as special game generating game device groups for generating a special game state.

Next, a game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when a game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 5022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 502.
3 is opened for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) 5023, the numbers 11, 13, 14, and 15 of the entry symbol display device 5025 are lit and displayed, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The eleventh, the thirteenth, the fourteenth, and the fifteenth correspond to the entrances of the 16 consecutive entrances 5024 which are relatively difficult to enter. Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with a maximum of 14 unit games, and the unit game is
Or the game ball reaches the guidance increasing device operating area 5028
The process is terminated by either passing through b. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operation gate 5022 and the accessory operation port (score increasing device operation port) 5023 are a group of game apparatuses for the second game mode (special game state). It is functioning.

As described above, the pachinko machine 500 of the present embodiment is used.
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, the game ball that has entered the character object operation port (specific ball entry port) 5020 is guided to the guidance device 5028 through the guidance gutter 5026, and based on the display mode of the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5017, Since the guidance device 5028 is configured to operate, the gaming device has a novel configuration that has never existed before. In addition, the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5
Probability changing means for changing the symbol success / failure probability (big hit probability) in the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 5017 after the end of the special game state based on the type or combination of the big hit symbols determined and displayed at 017. Because
In terms of whether it is confirmed and displayed with a symbol for probability change,
It is possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 50 according to the sixth embodiment is described.
Although 01 has been described, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the display device for determining the operation of the guidance increasing device can be displayed by a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal (LCD). What is necessary is just a device which can be guided to two or more areas.

(Seventh Embodiment) Next, as a seventh embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 6001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The front part of the pachinko machine 6001 of the seventh embodiment has the same main body frame, middle frame, front frame, and upper plate as those of the front view of the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 6 formed on the front part
The surface structure 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 6010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 6010 includes the game board 60
A substantially circular game area 6011 is formed by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the game device 10, and a guide symbol operation gate 6016 as a start detection device is provided in the game area 6011. And a guide symbol display device 6017 as a variable display device, an accessory operation port (specific entry port) 6021 as a first variable entry device, and a guidance increasing device operation region 6019 using a game ball as a specific entry region. Guide device (rotating body) 6020a capable of guiding the player, a guide device operation gate 6022 as a detection device for the operation of the accessory, and an accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6023 as the second variable ball entry device. A 16-ball entry port 6024 in which 16 entry areas are arranged adjacent to each other, and a 16-ball entry port 6024
, A ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 6025 for lighting and displaying the identification information corresponding to each ball entry area, and a large number of obstacle nails (not shown).

The guide symbol operation gate 6016 is disposed on the left half side from the center of the game area 6011, and has a guide symbol operation gate passage detection switch 6016a (see FIG. 68) inside. When a game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 6016a, the guide symbol display device 601 is provided.
At 7, the variable display of a plurality of symbols is started. The guide symbol display device 6017 is arranged at the upper center of the game area 6011 and has three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area 6.
017a, a middle symbol display area 6017b, and a right symbol display area 6017c, and a plurality of symbols can be variably stopped and displayed. Guide symbol display device 601
In 7, for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the same three-digit symbol of "7, 7, 7", the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6021 is opened.

The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6021 is arranged at the center of the left half surface side of the game area 6011 and has a pair of movable pieces 6021a and 6021b.
Based on the operations of 1a and 6021b, the player enters an open state that is advantageous for entering the ball. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operating port (specific ball entrance) 6021 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6021 has the guiding device 6020a capable of guiding the game ball to the guidance increasing device operating area 6019 as described above. The guiding device 6020a is a disk-shaped accessory called a so-called rotator, in which six holes are formed side by side in the circumferential direction, and the number of gaming balls entering the accessory-operating port (specific entry opening) 6021 is 6 Into one of the two holes. That is, these six holes function as a game ball holding portion capable of temporarily holding the game balls, and one of these holes serves as the guidance increasing device operating area 60.
The other hole is the ball discharge area 6026 in the guide increase device operation area guide section (first holding section) 6020b that can be guided to 19.
The non-operating area guiding section (second holding section) 6020c is a guiding increasing device that can be guided to the outside.

[0378] Guidance increasing device operation area guidance unit 6020b
Is formed by a U-shaped hole cut out to the periphery of the rotating body 6020a, and has an opening capable of discharging (holding release) game balls in the periphery direction. Also,
The guidance increasing device non-operation area guiding portion 6020c is a circular hole that is not cut out to the peripheral edge, and cannot discharge (hold release) the game ball in the peripheral direction.

[0379] Further, the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 602
1 includes a guiding device 620 on the side opposite to the entrance of the accessory operating port (specific entrance) 6021 with the guiding device 6020a interposed therebetween.
A guidance route 6027 capable of guiding a game ball from 020a to the guidance increase device operation area 6019 is provided. The guide path 6027 is formed by the surrounding member 6 surrounding the guide device 6020a.
028, the guide device 6
020a has an opening on its peripheral surface. Here, the game ball that has entered the guidance increase device operation area guidance section 6020b is surrounded by the surrounding member 6028 and the guidance increase device operation area guidance section 6020b.
Is held up to the guide route 6027 during the rotation of, and when reaching the guide route 6027, it is discharged (released) to the guide route 6027 side. In addition, a game ball that has entered the guidance increase device non-operation area guidance portion 6020c is guided by the guidance device
The rotation of 0a guides the ball to the ball discharge area 6026 and discharges it. In addition, the ball discharge area 6026 is provided with the guiding device 602.
0a is disposed at the lower left.

The guidance increasing device operation area 6019 is provided below the center of the guidance device 6020a, and is internally provided with the guidance increasing device operation area passage detection switch 6019a (see FIG. 70).
It has. When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 6019a, the guidance increasing device operates and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated. In addition, the guidance increase device,
It is a special device mainly constituted by the main control unit 6140 (see FIG. 68) and for changing a game state.

The accessory guidance device operation gate 6022 is disposed on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 6011, and has an accessory guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 6022a (see FIG. 70) inside. During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 6022a of the accessory guiding device operating gate 6022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6023 is opened.

[0382] Accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 602
Reference numeral 3 denotes a pair of movable pieces 6023a and 6023b which are disposed above the right half surface side of the center of the game area 6011 and are in an open state advantageous for the player to enter the ball based on the operation of the movable pieces 6023a and 6023b. In addition, a switch 6023c for detecting the entry of the accessory actuation port into the inside (see FIG. 70).
When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 6023c, predetermined identification information (identification information generally corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is difficult) of the entry symbol display device 6025 is illuminated and scored. The increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 6023 based on the operation of the openable and closable panel.

[0383] The 16 consecutive entry balls 6024 are provided in the game area 601.
1 is provided at the lowermost portion, and in front of it is provided a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 6025.
Each of the 16 consecutive entry ball openings 6024 is provided with 16 consecutive entry ball detection switches 6025a (see FIG. 68), and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 6025a, the entry ball corresponding to the entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 6025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 6001, the launching of 16 game balls is regarded as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on the combination of the identification information illuminated and displayed in the 16 games. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. The entering symbol display device (identification information display device) 6025 may be, for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, or a liquid crystal (LCD) display.
When a game ball is detected at 025a, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, liquid crystal (LC)
D) The identification information (number) is displayed on the display screen.

Next, regarding the back structure of the pachinko machine 6001, the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, an electronic control unit 6130 of the pachinko machine 6001 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the electronic control unit 6130 includes a main control unit 6140
And a winning ball control unit (frame control unit) 6150 connected to the main control unit 6140, a symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit)
6160, lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 61
70 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 6180. The main control unit 6140 includes a main control board 6340. The four control units 6150, 6160, 6170, and 6180 other than the main control unit 6140 are each configured as a sub control unit, and a prize ball control board (frame) as a sub control board. Control board) 6350, symbol display device control board 6
360, a lamp output device control board 6370 and an audio output device control board 6380 are provided.

[0386] The main control board 6340 is the same as the C shown in FIG.
A PU 1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 1
480, and controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 6001 (that is, basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area by a control program stored in the ROM 1482. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Returning to FIG. 68, main controller 6140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing the sub-controllers 6150, 6160, 6170, and 6180 to perform processing. In addition, the main control unit 6140 to each sub control unit 6150,
Data is transmitted to 6160, 6170, and 6180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 6140 to 6180 has a power receiving board 6128 connected to the main power supply 6129.
To the power supply unit 6127 and further to the power supply relay board 61
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at the time of power-on, described later, is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 6121.

The main control section 6140 is connected to a 16-switch relay board 6031, a relay board 6200, a guide symbol operation gate passage detection switch 6016a, a frame external terminal board 6122, and a frame relay board 6200b. 1
A sixteen-connection ball detection switch 6025a is connected to the six-connection switch relay board 6031, and a detection signal from the sixteen connection ball detection switch 6025a is transmitted to the main control unit 6140. Note that the main control unit 6140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 6807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 68, as shown in FIG. 70, the relay board 6200 includes a guidance increasing device operation area passage detection switch 6019a, a character object guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 6022a, and a character object opening (score increasing device). Actuation port) ball entry detection switch 6023c, accessory actuation port (score increasing device actuation port) solenoid 6023d, board external terminal board 60
32 and the like are connected. The movable member operating port (score increasing device operating port) solenoid 6023d is a movable piece 6023a, 6023b of the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6023.
Is a solenoid for opening the valve. The board external terminal board 6032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 68, frame external terminal board 6122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 6104, a door switch 6202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 6150. On the frame relay board 6200b, a supply ball out detection switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 6150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 6140, and includes a memory clear switch substrate 6191,
Ball lending counting sensor 6192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 6013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 6
194, a CR operation board 6195, a prize ball motor sensor board 6196, a launching apparatus control board 6201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 6191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 6192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 6013 to lend the ball lent. A sensor for counting the number and a prize ball flow path switching solenoid 6194 are solenoids for switching the flow paths for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 6109. A CR operation board 6195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as a ball lending and the number of remaining cards with a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 6013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 6196 relates to award ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 6297.

The launching device control board 6201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 68, symbol display device control section 616
0 is a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor), and these arithmetic circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 6140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 69, a guide symbol display device board 6017d having a display panel is connected to the symbol display device control unit 6160. The operation control of the (display panel) 6017 (that is, the display control of the display device) is performed. In addition, the incoming ball symbol display device 6025
Is controlled by the main control unit 6140, but the display control may be performed by the symbol display device control unit 6160.

Returning to FIG. 68, the lamp output device control unit 61
70 is the same arithmetic circuit component (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.) as the symbol display device control unit 6160
And a main control unit 61 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 6170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 68, audio output device control section 618
Numeral 0 includes the same arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) as the symbol display device control unit 6160,
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 6140. An audio relay board 1203 similar to that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 6180.
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 6380 are provided with symbol display. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of the reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 6160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 6140 as a command signal that targets the lamp output device control unit 6170 or the sound output device control unit 6180 as an operation command target.

The symbol display device control unit 616 described above
0, the lamp output device control unit 6170 and the audio output device control unit 6180 include the main control unit 6140 and the frame control unit 6150.
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

The electronic control unit 613 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 6001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 6140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 60
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

A guide symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG. 71 as a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG.
0) is performed separately. In addition, the guide symbol operation gate 601
6 (that is, the guide symbol operation detection switch 601)
6a), a pass / fail judgment job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed, and further, a symbol determining random number and a reach mode determining random number are obtained.
The result is stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, the guide symbol operation gate 60
16 based on the passage of the game ball to the guide symbol display device 60
Each symbol at 17 (in this case, a 3-digit guide symbol)
Is started. Next, in S622,
With reference to the hit / fail result obtained in the hit / fail judgment job, in the case of hit determination (“1”) (S623: YES), S63
2, the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is read, and further, the process proceeds to S633, and the jackpot number determined similarly by the random number is read. After a predetermined reach display mode after being aligned, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol and the middle symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, where the off-reach symbol number and the off-right symbol number determined by the random numbers are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation determination ("3") (S625), the flow advances to S626 to read out each symbol number determined by the random number, and the flow advances to S627 to shift each guide symbol to each other. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. It should be noted that, even in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes, such as delaying the variable display time of only one symbol.

[0403] Such a guide symbol display job (S62)
The display mode determined in (0) is output as corresponding command data (command signal) from the main control unit 6140 to the symbol display device control unit 6160 at a predetermined time interval,
The symbol display device control unit 6160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data. The symbol display device control unit 6160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), the display control in the guide symbol display device 6017 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 6160.

Next, a game mode of the pachinko machine 6001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 6016, the guide symbol display device 601
7 is activated. When the predetermined symbol combination is definitely displayed on the guide symbol display device 6017, the movable pieces 6021a and 6021b of the accessory actuation port (specific ball entry port) 6021 are opened for a predetermined time. The opening time differs depending on the combination of the above symbols, and is “1, 1, 1”, “5, 5, 5”, “9,
When the confirmation display is made at “9, 9”, 0.3 seconds, “3,
When the display is confirmed at “3, 3”, 0.6 seconds, “7,
When the display is confirmed with “7, 7”, it is opened for 5.7 seconds. However, if the display is confirmed with “7, 7, 7”, the unit game (game) is terminated, and after the elapse of the opening wait time of about 4.5 seconds, the next unit game is started, and the accessory is activated. The mouth (specific entrance) 6021 is opened for 5.7 seconds. During the opening wait time and during the opening operation, the guide symbol operation gate 6016 is invalidated, and the guide symbol display device 6017 does not operate even if a game ball passes.

[0405] The game ball is used as an accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 602.
When the ball enters 1, the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating region guiding portion 6020b or the guiding increasing device non-operation region guiding portion 6020c in the guiding device 6020a.
Here, when a game ball enters the guidance increase device operation region 6019 from the operation region guidance portion 6020b due to the rotation of the guidance device 6020a, the guidance increase device (main control unit) operates and a special game state occurs. This guidance increasing device is supposed to be operated continuously up to a maximum of 14 unit games (14 games). It is displayed in the symbol display area 6017c, and the number of remaining rights is displayed at the time of starting the next unit game (game). In this case, the guide symbol display device 6017
Has a function as a right count display device. Note that the number-of-rights display device is replaced with a guide symbol display device
Separately from 7, for example, it is also possible to provide from the center of the game area 6011 to the right half surface side.

[0406] The manner of rotation of the guidance device 6020a differs depending on the type or combination of symbols displayed on the guidance symbol display device 6017. For example, "1, 1, 1", "3,
When the display is fixed at 3,3,5,5,5,9,9,9, the rotation is performed at a constant cycle. When the display is fixed at 7,7,7, Object operation port (specific entrance) 60
When the shutter 21 is opened, the rotation operation is temporarily stopped.

The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, and the guide symbol operation gate 6016, the guide symbol display device 6017, the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 6021, and the guide device 6020a are provided in the first game mode ( It functions as a game device group for a normal game state).

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when a game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 6022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 602.
3 open for 2.0 seconds. When a game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) 6023, the seventh, eighth, tenth and eleventh numbers of the entry symbol display device 6025 are lit and displayed, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The 7th, 8th, 10th and 11th are 16
It corresponds to the entrance of the continuous entrance 6024 which is difficult to enter.
Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with the unit game of 14 times as an upper limit, and whether the unit game reaches 14 times,
The process ends when any of the game balls enters the guidance increasing device operation area 6019. In addition, for 10 seconds after the game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) 6023, even if the game ball passes through the special item guidance device operation gate 6022, the role item operation port (score increase device activation). The mouth) 6023 does not open. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operation gate 602.
2. The accessory port (score increasing device port) 6023 is the third
Functioning as a game device group for the game mode (special game state).

[0409] In the pachinko machine 6001 of this embodiment, based on the type of the symbol stopped and displayed on the guide symbol display device 6017 by the big hit determination, after the end of the special game state, it is determined whether or not the symbol is hit until the next big hit. May be provided to change (improve) the probability (big hit probability).
Specifically, the symbol determination random value for determining the jackpot symbol stored in advance is composed of a random value for probability change and a random value for non-probability change, and the probability is changed in accordance with the acquisition of each random value. Symbol (for example, “7, 7, 7]) or non-probability changing symbol (for example,“ 2, 2, 2 ”) is stopped and displayed when the probability changing symbol is stopped and displayed. After the end of the special game state, the probability of the success / failure determination (big hit probability) can be improved to about 4 to 5 times the normal hit until the next big hit.

[0410] As described above, the pachinko machine 60 of the present embodiment is used.
In 01, it is possible to divide various gaming devices into specific groups and enjoy a plurality of gaming modes.
In particular, on the guidance symbol display device 6017, after a specific display mode to be a hit is definitely displayed, a game ball that has entered the character object operating port (specific entry port) 6021 is guided by the guidance device 60.
It may be possible to provide the player with a high level of entertainment interest by being guided to the guidance increasing device operation area 6019 or the ball discharge area 6026 by the 20a.

Hereinafter, a modification of the structure of the game board 6010 in the pachinko machine 6001 will be described with reference to FIGS. It is assumed that a gaming device not particularly described has the same configuration as the sixth embodiment described above.

(Modification 1) In Modification 1 of FIG. 72, as a gaming machine group for the first game mode (normal game state), a guide symbol operation gate 6416a is provided in a game area 6011.
The guide symbol operation gate 6416b,
6416c is on the left and right sides from the center of the game area 6011,
In addition, the guide symbol display device 6417 is located at the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 6421 is located below the guide symbol display device 6417.
Reference numerals 19 are provided below the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6421, respectively. In addition, the guide symbol display device 6417
Are provided with two guide symbol operation storage display devices (starting storage display devices) 6418 for displaying the storage of the passing of the game balls to the guide symbol operation gates 6416a to 6416c.

[0413] Furthermore, the second game mode (special game state)
As a group of gaming devices for use, the operation guide gates 6422a, 642 of the accessory guiding device are located on the lower left and right sides from the center of the gaming area 6011.
2b is also below the center of the game area 6011,
Under the guidance increasing device operating area 6419, there are provided accessory operating ports (score increasing device operating ports) 6423, respectively.

[0414] The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6421 includes a pair of movable pieces 6421a and 6421b.
A guide device 6420a is provided which can guide a game ball entered inside by opening (opening operation) of 421a and 6421b to a guide increase device operation region 6419. Guiding device 64
Reference numeral 20a denotes a concave accessory called a so-called crune, in which three holes are formed at the bottom, and a game board 60
One hole formed on the front side toward 10 is an operation guiding portion 6420b capable of guiding a game ball to the guidance increasing device operating region 6419, and two holes formed on the back side are non-operation guiding portions 6420c and 6420c. It has been. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the non-operation guiding section 6420c is a region other than the guidance increasing device operation region 6419 (a non-specific ball input region).
It is guided to. In addition, it is also possible to dispose an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operating port (specific entrance opening) 6421 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

[0415] Accessory opening (scoring device activation opening) 642
3 is provided with one open / close plate 6423a,
If 3a is opened in the forward direction of the game area 6011, the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 6423 becomes an open state relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, a pair of movable pieces is provided in the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6423,
Based on the operation (opening) of the movable piece to the left and right, it is also possible to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6423.

[0416] Hereinafter, a game mode of a pachinko machine having the above-described game board configuration will be described. When the game ball passes through any of the guide symbol operation gates 6416a to 6416c, the guide symbol display device 6417 operates to start variable display of symbols. It should be noted that, while the guidance symbol display device 6417 is operating, the game balls are operated by the operation gates 6416a to 6416c.
After passing through, up to two items can be stored, and one or two guide symbol operation storage display devices 6418 are lit and displayed according to the storage.

When a specific symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 6417, the accessory operation port (specific entry port)
The game ball 6421 is released for 2.5 seconds and enters the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6421, and the guiding ball 6420a
After passing through a predetermined rotation mode (circumferential mode) at, any one of the operation guidance section 6420b or the non-operation guidance section 6420c and passing through the induction increasing device operating region 6419 or the region other than the induction increasing device operating region 6419 You are guided to Then, when a game ball passes through the operation guiding section 6420b and enters the guidance increasing device operation area 6419, the guidance increasing device is activated, and a special game state is generated. In the special game state, a maximum of 14 unit games can be continued, and the number of continuations (the number of rights) is determined by the guide symbol display device 6417.
Is displayed in the medium symbol display area 6417b, and the number of remaining rights is displayed when the next unit game (game) starts.

[0418] During the operation of the guidance increase device, that is, during the special game state, the accessory guidance device operation gates 6422a and 6422.
When the game ball passes through b, the accessory operation port (score increase apparatus operation port) 6423 is opened. When a game ball enters the opened bonus object operation port (score increase device operation port) 6423, predetermined numeral lamps (for example, “7”, “10”, “13”, “14”) are lit on the entry symbol display device 6025. In addition to being displayed, the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled. In addition, the opening operation of the accessory operation port (score increase apparatus operation port) 6423 is terminated when a game ball enters or after the third unit game including the unit game is completed. In addition, the guidance increasing device ends the operation when the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 6419 during its operation or when the operation of the guidance increasing device is continued up to 14 times.

(Modification 2) In Modification 2 of FIG. 73, as a gaming machine group for the first game mode (normal game state), a guide symbol operation gate 6516 is provided on the left half surface side from the center of the game area 6011, The guide symbol display device 6517 is located above the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (specific entrance).
6521 is the center of the game area 6011 and below the guidance symbol display device 6517, the guidance increasing device operation area 652
0b are provided inside the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6521, respectively.

[0420] Furthermore, the second game mode (special game state)
As a group of gaming devices
Is located on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6523 is provided in the game area 6011.
11 below the center and the induction increase device operating area 6519
, Respectively.

The accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6521 includes a pair of movable pieces 6521a and 6521b.
A guide portion 6526 that can temporarily roll a game ball that has entered the inside by opening (opening operation) of 521a and 6521b, a guidance increasing device operation region 6520b as a specific entry ball region, and a non-specific entry. Guidance increase device non-operation areas 6520c and 6520c as a sphere area are provided. The guiding portion 6526 includes a guiding increasing device operating area 6520.
b, the guide increase device non-operation area 6520c, formed before the entrance of the 6520c, and the guide increase apparatus operation area 6520;
b, a guidance path inclined toward the guidance increase device non-operation areas 6520c, 6520c. The game ball rolled in the guiding section 6526, which is the guiding path, is the guiding increasing device operating region 6520b or the guiding increasing device non-operating region 652.
0c. In addition, the guidance increasing device operation area 6520b is provided between the two guidance increasing device non-operation areas 6520c and 6520c, and internally includes the guidance increasing device operation area passage detection switch 6019a.
(See FIG. 70). In addition, the game area 6011
It is also possible to arrange an opening / closing plate that can be opened and closed in the front direction, and open the accessory operation port (specific ball entry opening) 6521 based on the operation of the opening / closing plate.

[0422] Accessory opening (score increasing device opening) 652
3 is provided with one open / close plate 6523a,
If 3a is opened in the forward direction of the game area 6011, the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 6523 becomes an open state relatively advantageous to the player. In addition, a pair of movable pieces is arranged in the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6523,
Based on the operation (opening) of the movable piece to the left and right, it is also possible to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6523.

[0423] Hereinafter, the game mode of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned game board configuration will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 6516, the guide symbol display device 6517 operates to start variable display of symbols. In addition,
Even if a game ball passes through the operation gate 6516 while the guide symbol display device 6517 is operating, the passage is invalidated.

When the specific symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 6517, the accessory operation port (specific entry port)
After the game ball 6521 is released for 4.0 seconds and enters the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6521, it rolls on the guide section 6526, and thereafter, the guide increase device operation area 6520b or the guide increase device non-operating area. The ball enters one of the operation areas 6520c. A game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 6520b, and the internal guiding increasing device operating area passage detection switch 60
When a game ball is detected at 19a (see FIG. 70), the guidance increasing device is activated, and a special game state occurs.

When the game ball passes through the role-guiding device operating gate 6522 during the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, a role-operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6523 is provided.
Is released. When a game ball enters the opened bonus object operation port (score increase device operation port) 6523, a predetermined number lamp (for example, “7”, “1”) is displayed on the entrance symbol display device 6025.
0 "," 13 ", and" 14 ") are displayed, and the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled.
In the special game state, a maximum of 14 unit games can be continued, and the guidance increasing device is configured such that a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 6520b during its operation, or the guidance increasing device If the operation has been continued up to 14 times, the operation ends.

(Modification 3) In Modification 3 of FIG. 74, as a group of gaming machines for the first gaming mode (normal gaming state), a guide symbol operation gate 6616 is provided on the left half side from the center of the gaming area 6011, The guide symbol display device 6617 is located above the center of the game area 6011 and has an accessory operation port (specific entrance port).
6621 is the center of the game area 6011 and above the guide symbol display device 6617, the guide device 6620 is at the center of the game area 6011 and below the guide symbol display device 6617, and the guide increase device operation area 6619 is a guide device 662.
0, respectively.

Further, the second game mode (special game state)
As a group of gaming devices,
Is located on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 6623 is provided in the game area 6011.
11 are provided on the lower right side of the center from the center of 11 and below the accessory guide device operating gate 6622.

The guide symbol display device 6617 includes a left symbol display area 6617a and a right symbol display area 6617b. The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6621 includes a pair of movable pieces 6621a and 6621b. In addition, a game board 6010 from the inside of the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6621
A guide path 6626 is provided to guide the game ball that has entered the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6621 to the entrance of the guide device 6620. In addition, an opening / closing plate that can be opened and closed in the front direction of the game area 6011 is provided, and based on the operation of the opening / closing plate, an accessory operation port (specific entrance opening) 6.
621 can also be in an open state.

[0429] The guiding device 6620 is a concave accessory called a so-called clune. The guiding device 6620 has three holes formed in the bottom portion. Guidance increase device operation area 6619
The operation guide portion 6620b capable of guiding a game ball to the left and right and two non-operation guide portions 6620c and 6620c formed on the left and right sides thereof.
620c. The game ball that has passed through the non-operation inducing section 6620c is guided to a region other than the guidance increasing device operating region 6619 (a non-specific entering ball region).

[0430] Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 662
3 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 6623a and 6623b, and when the movable pieces 6623a and 6623b are operated and opened to the left and right, the opening for the accessory (operating port for increasing the score) 6623 is relatively advantageous to the player. State. In addition, it is also possible to dispose an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6623 based on the operation of the open and close plate.

[0431] Hereinafter, a game mode of a pachinko machine having the above-described game board configuration will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 6616, the guide symbol display device 6617 operates to start variable display of symbols. In addition,
Even if a game ball passes through the operation gate 6616 while the guide symbol display device 6617 is operating, the passage is invalidated.

When the specific symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 6617, the accessory operation port (specific entry port)
The game ball 6621 is released for 8.0 seconds, and the game ball having entered the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6621 enters the guidance device 6620 via the guidance path 6626. Guiding device 6620
The game ball that has entered the sphere passes through either the operation guiding unit 6620b or the non-operation guiding units 6620c, 6620c.
When the game ball passes through the operation guiding section 6620b and enters the guidance increasing device operating region 6619, and is detected by the internal guidance increasing device operating region passage detection switch 6019a (see FIG. 70), the guiding increasing device is activated. Then, a special game state occurs.

When a game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 6622 during the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6623.
Is released. When a game ball enters the opened bonus object operation port (score increase device operation port) 6623, a predetermined number lamp (for example, “7” “1”) is displayed on the entrance symbol display device 6025.
0 "," 13 ", and" 14 ") are displayed, and the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled.
In addition, in the special game state, a maximum of 14 unit games can be continued, and the guidance increasing device is configured such that a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 6619 during its operation, or the guidance increasing device If the operation has been continued up to 14 times, the operation ends. Further, a score increasing device operating port (special entrance port) 6627 is provided on the left half side from the center of the game area 6011, and the score increasing device operating port (special entrance port) 6627 is provided.
When a game ball enters the ball 27, a predetermined game ball is paid out during the unit game.

(Modification 4) In Modification 4 of FIG. 75, as a group of gaming devices for the first game mode (normal gaming state), a guide symbol operating device 6716 is provided at the center of the game area 6011 and a guide symbol display device. Reference numeral 6717 is a left-hand half-face side from the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 672.
1 is provided above the right half surface side from the center of the game area 6011, and the guidance increasing device operation area 6721b is provided inside the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 6721, respectively.

Further, the second game mode (special game state)
As a group of gaming devices, the operation guide gate 6722 for the accessory guiding device
a, 6722b are located below the left and right half surfaces from the center of the game area 6011, and the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port).
6723 are provided below the center of the game area 6011 on the right half side.

The guide symbol operating device 6716 is constituted by obstacle nails 6023 whose entrances are arranged in a C-shape, and a game ball entered from the entrance is guided to the guide device 6716e. This guiding device 6716e is a concave accessory called a so-called krune, and has three holes formed at the bottom. Display device opening 6
An operation guide part 6716c capable of guiding a game ball to 716d
The two holes formed on the left and right sides of the
16b and 6716b. Non-operation guide 671
The game ball that has passed through 6b is guided to an area other than the guide symbol display device operation port 6716d (a guide symbol display device non-operation port).

The accessory operation port (specific entrance) 6721 is provided with a single opening / closing plate 6721a. The ball opening 6721 is in an open state that is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the accessory port (specific entrance)
Inside the 6721, three regions are formed side by side, and the center of the side by side is the induction increasing device operating region 6721.
b, both sides of the guidance increasing device operation region 6721b are the guidance increasing device non-operation regions 6721c and 6721c. In addition, a pair of movable pieces are provided in the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6721, and based on the operation (opening) of the movable piece to the left and right, the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 6721 is set. An open state is also possible.

[0438] Hereinafter, the game mode of the pachinko machine having the above-mentioned game board configuration will be described. When a game ball enters the guidance symbol display device operation port 6716d, the guidance symbol display device 6717 is activated and starts variable display of symbols.

When the specific symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 6717, the accessory operation port (specific entry port)
6721 is released for 8.0 seconds, and the game ball that has entered the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6721 is a guidance increase apparatus operation area 6721b or a guidance increase apparatus non-operation area 6721c,
Enters any one of 6721c. When a game ball enters the guidance increase device operation area 6721b and is detected by the internal guidance increase device operation region passage detection switch 6019a (see FIG. 70), the guidance increase device operates and a special game state occurs. .

[0440] During the operation of the guidance increase device, that is, during the special game state, the accessory guidance device operation gates 6722a and 6722.
When the game ball passes through b, the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 6723 is opened. When a game ball enters the opened bonus object operation port (score increase device operation port) 6723, predetermined numeral lamps (for example, “7”, “10”, “13”, “14”) are turned on on the entrance symbol display device 6025. In addition to being displayed, the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled. In the special game state, a maximum of 14 unit games can be continued, and the guidance increasing device is configured such that the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 6721b during its operation, or the guidance increasing device If the operation has been continued up to 14 times, the operation ends.

(Modification 5) In Modification 5 of FIG. 76, as a group of game devices for the first game mode (normal game state), a guide symbol operation gate 6816a is provided in the game area 6011.
In the lower center of the guide symbol operation gate 6816b,
6816c is below the center of the game area 6011 on both left and right sides, and the guide symbol display device 6817 is
From the center to the right half side, there is an accessory port (specific entrance) 68
21 is located above the center of the game area 6011,
0 is located in the center of the game area 6011 and below the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6821, the guidance increasing device operation area 68
19 are provided inside the guidance device 6820, respectively. The guidance symbol display device 6817 is provided with three guidance symbol operation storage display devices (starting storage display devices) 6818 for displaying the storage of the passing of the game ball to the guidance symbol operation gates 6816a to 6816c.

Further, the second game mode (special game state)
As a gaming device for the game, a working port (operating port for score increase device)
6823 is provided below the center of the game area 6011.

The guide symbol display device 6817 includes a left symbol display area 6817a, a middle symbol display area 6817b, and a right symbol display area 6817c. The accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6821 is a pair of movable pieces 6821a and 6821b.
It has. In addition, the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 682
At the bottom of 1, a game ball having entered the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 6821 is provided with the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 682.
1 for guiding to the guiding device 6820 below
821c is provided. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 6821 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

[0444] The guiding device 6820 is a concave accessory called a so-called clune. The guiding device 6820 has three holes formed at the bottom, and one hole formed at the center on the front side toward the game board 6010 is Guidance increase device operation area 6819
The operation guiding section 6820b capable of guiding the game ball to the left and right, and two holes formed on the left and right sides thereof are non-operation guiding sections 6820c and 6820c.
820c. The game ball that has passed through the non-operation inducing section 6820c is guided to an area other than the guidance increasing apparatus operation area 6819 (non-specific ball entry area).

[0445] Accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 682
3 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 6823a and 6823b, and when the movable pieces 6823a and 6823b are operated and opened to the left and right, the opening for the accessory (operating port for increasing the score) 6823 is relatively advantageous to the player. State. In addition, it is also possible to dispose an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 6011, and to open the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 6823 based on the operation of the openable and closable panel.

[0446] Hereinafter, a game mode of a pachinko machine having the above-described game board configuration will be described. When the game ball passes through any of the guide symbol operation gates 6816a to 6816c, the guide symbol display device 6817 operates to start variable display of symbols. It should be noted that, while the guidance symbol display device 6817 is operating, the game balls are operated by the respective operation gates 6816a to 6816c.
, Up to three can be stored, and according to the storage, one to three guidance symbol operation storage and display devices 6818 are lit and displayed.

When the specific symbol combination (winning symbol) is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 6817, the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 6821 and the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6823 are displayed. Opens for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the opened accessory opening (specific entry opening) 6821, "2", "5", "6", and "7" of the entry symbol display device 6025 light up and are displayed. (Specific entrance) 6821 is closed. In addition, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6
When a game ball enters the ball 823, the ball entry symbol display device 602
5, "11", "12", "13", and "15" are lit and displayed, and the points obtained during the unit game are doubled. Note that the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6823 is closed by the ball entry. In addition, when there is no ball in the opened role operating port (specific ball entry port) 6821 or when there is no ball in the role action opening (score increasing device operation port) 6823, the unit game (game) )), The opening is released after 3 unit games (3 games)
The accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 6823 is to be closed. In other words, when there is no ball entry, the opening is continued up to three times including the unit game (game) opened.

On the other hand, an accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6821
The game ball which has entered the ball enters the guiding device 6820 through the guiding port 6821c. The game ball that has entered the guiding device 6820 is actuated by the guiding unit 6820b or the non-guiding unit 682.
0c and 6820c. The game ball passes through the operation guide section 6820b and the guide increase device operation area 6
When the player enters the ball 819 and is detected by the internal guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 6019a (see FIG. 70), the guidance increase device is activated, and a special game state occurs.

During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, the probability that the symbol is hit on the guidance symbol display device 6817 and displayed is about 100 times higher. In the special game state, a maximum of 14 unit games can be continued, and the guidance increasing device is configured such that a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operating area 6819 during its operation, or the guidance increasing device If the operation has been continued up to 14 times, the operation ends. The number of continuations (the number of rights) is determined by the game area 6
It is displayed on the guidance increasing device operation continuation number display device 6826 disposed on the left half side from the center of 011 and displays the number of remaining rights at the start of the next and subsequent unit games (games).

In this case, for example, when the game ball is fired with the maximum firing force (so-called right strike), it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the guide symbol operation gate 6816c, and the symbol hits the guide symbol display device 6817, and the symbol has a very high probability. , And it becomes easier to enter the accessory actuation opening (score increasing device activation opening) 6823 from the right side (movable piece 6823b side). Therefore, in the special game state, the player can acquire a large amount of prizes. Further, since the game ball is fired by the so-called right hit, it is difficult to enter the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 6821 (that is, it is difficult to enter the guidance increasing device operation area 6819), and guidance is provided. It may be possible to avoid ending the operation of the guidance increasing device by entering the increasing device operation area 6819 as much as possible.

As described above, the pachinko machine 60 according to the seventh embodiment is described.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the guide symbol display device can display a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal (LCD).

(Eighth Embodiment) Next, as an eighth embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 7001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The front portion of the pachinko machine 7001 of the eighth embodiment has a main body frame, a middle frame, a front frame, an upper plate, and a lower frame similar to those of the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. It is composed of a plate portion and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the surface structure of the game board 7010 formed on the front portion will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 7010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 7010 has an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the game board 7010.
This forms a substantially circular game area 7011. In the game area 7011, a guide symbol operation gate 7016 as a start detection device, a guide symbol display device 7017 as a first variable display device, and a first variable input An accessory actuation port (specific entrance) 7021 as a ball device, a guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 as a second variable display device,
A guidance increasing device as a storage device or a guidance device, an operation region guidance device (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a guidance device) 7028,
Activating gate 7 for the accessory guidance device as a detecting device for actuation of the accessory
022, an accessory port (score increasing device port) 7023 as a second variable ball entry device, a 16-port entry ball port 7024 in which 16 entry fields are arranged adjacent to each other, and a 16-port entry A ball entry pattern display device (identification information display device) 7025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry area of the ball opening 7024.
And a number of obstacle nails (not shown) and the like.

The guide symbol operation gate 7016 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 7011, and has a guide symbol operation gate passage detection switch 7016a (see FIG. 80) inside. When a game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 7016a, the guide symbol display device 7017 operates to start variable display of symbols.

The guide symbol display device 7017 is provided in the game area 7
Approximately at the center of 011 and the induction increase device operation gate 70
16 and includes a left symbol display area 7017a and a right symbol display area 7017b. The guide symbol display device 7017 includes a guide symbol operation gate 7016.
There are provided four guide symbol operation storage and display devices (starting storage display devices) 7017c for displaying the storage of the passing of the game ball to the player.

[0456] The accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 7021 is disposed substantially above the center of the game area 7011, and a pair of movable pieces 7021a, 702a, which operate based on the result determined and displayed on the guide symbol display device 7017. 7021b. Based on the operation of the pair of movable pieces 7021a and 7021b, the accessory operation port (specific entry opening) 7021 enters an open state that is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. In addition, the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 7021 is provided with a guiding path (for guiding the game ball that has entered the accessory operation opening (specific entrance) 7021 to the guidance increasing device operation area induction device 7028. Guide gutter)
7026. Guidance path (guidance gutter) 7026
Is formed on the back side of the game board 7010, and functions as a passage of a game ball between the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 7021 and the guidance increase device operation area guidance device 7028. An opening / closing plate that can be opened / closed in the forward direction of the game area 7011 may be provided, and based on the operation of the opening / closing plate, the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 7021 may be opened.

Guidance increase device operation area guidance device 7028
Is arranged on the left half side from the center of the game area 7011,
A storage unit (reservation device) 7029 for temporarily storing game balls guided from the guidance gutter 7026 and a rotating body 7030 called a so-called distribution device are provided. Storage unit 702
The exit 9 is provided with a specific entrance detection switch 7027, and based on this detection, the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 7018 is activated. Note that the rotating body 7030 is
The game ball 7010 is rotatable in both left and right directions toward the game board 7010. When the game ball dropped from the storage 7029 enters the recess 7028a provided in the rotating body 7030 and rotates counterclockwise, the guidance increasing device is activated. When the game ball is guided to the area 7028b and rotated clockwise, the game ball is guided to the stored ball discharge port 7028c. The rotating body 7030 is in the game ball receiving state or the guiding standby state when the rotating body 7030 is not operated, that is, when the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 is in the variable start waiting state or the variable display state. .

The game balls stored in the storage section 7029 of the guiding device 7028 are guided by the rotating body 7030 to either the guidance increasing device operating area 7028b or the stored ball discharge port 7028c. Guidance increase device operation area 7028
b is provided at the lower left of the guidance device 7028, and is provided inside the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 7019a (FIG. 8).
0). When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 7019a, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry ball symbol display device 7025 is lit and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is activated. When activated, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The special game state is a game state in which a prize acquired during one game (unit game) is doubled, and the game state is continued with a predetermined number of games as an upper limit (14 times in this embodiment). Note that the guidance increase device is a special device mainly configured by the main control unit 7140 (see FIG. 78) and changing a game state.

[0459] Symbol display device 701 for judging operation of guidance increasing device
Numeral 8 is located substantially at the center of the game area 7011 and below the guide symbol display device 7017, and includes three display areas: a left symbol display area 7018a, a middle symbol display area 7018b, and a right symbol display area 7018c. ing. Each of the symbol display areas 7018a to 7018c starts variable display based on the detection result of the specific entrance detection switch 7027. Guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 7
018, the display areas 7018a to 7018c
Is capable of variably stopping and displaying a plurality of symbols. For example, if the symbols are stopped and displayed together with the same symbol of "7, 7, 7" (fixed display), a big hit occurs. The rotating body 7030 rotates counterclockwise, and the recess 7028
The game ball in a is the guidance increasing device operating area 7028
b, and the guidance increasing device (described later) operates.
Further, if the final display is performed in a mode other than the symbol display mode in the case of the big hit (outside display mode), the rotating body 7030 is displayed.
Rotates clockwise, and the game ball is moved to the storage ball discharge port 7028c.
Guided to.

[0460] On the other hand, the accessory guidance device operation gate 7022
Is arranged on the right half side from the center of the game area 7011,
Inside the accessory guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 702
2a (see FIG. 80). During the occurrence of the special game state, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 7022a of the accessory guiding device operating gate 7022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 7023 is opened.

[0460] Accessory opening (scoring increase device opening) 702
Reference numeral 3 denotes a pair of movable pieces 7023a and 7023b which are disposed below the center of the game area 7011 on the right half side and lower than the center of the game area 7011. In addition, the inside of the accessory actuation opening detection switch 7023c is provided inside (see FIG. 80).
When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 7023c, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry symbol display device 7025 is illuminated and scored. The increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. Note that the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 70
It is also possible to arrange an openable / closable plate in the front of the game area 7011 at 23 and to open the accessory port (score increasing device operating port) 7023 based on the operation of the open / close plate.

[0462] The 16 consecutive entry ports 7024 are provided in the game area 701.
1, a ball-in symbol display device (identification information display device) 7025 is provided in front of it.
A 16 consecutive ball detection switch 7025a (see FIG. 78) is provided in each of the 16 consecutive ball entrances 7024, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 7025a, the incoming ball corresponding to the ball entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 7025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 7001, the launching of 16 game balls is set as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on a combination of the identification information lit on the 16 balls. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. The entering symbol display device (identification information display device) 7025 can be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display. In this case, the detection switch 702 is used.
When a game ball is detected in 5a, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, and a liquid crystal (LCD) display screen of a 7-segment LED display device (identification information display device) 7025 corresponding to the ball entry area. Is displayed.

Next, regarding the back structure of the pachinko machine 7001, the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 7130 of the pachinko machine 7001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 7130 includes a main control unit 7140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 7 connected to the main control unit 7140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 7160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 7170 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 7180. The main control unit 7140 includes a main control board 7340
And the above four control units 71 other than the main control unit 7140
50, 7160, 7170, and 7180 are each configured as a sub-control unit, and include a prize ball control board (frame control board) 7350, a symbol display device control board 7360, a lamp output device control board 7370, and an audio output device control board, which are sub-control boards. 7380.

The main control board 7340 includes the CP shown in FIG.
U1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 14
The control program stored in the ROM 1482 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 7001 using the RAM 1481 as a work area (that is, the basic progress control of the game). Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Referring back to FIG. 78, main control unit 7140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, to each of sub-control units 7150, 7160, 7170, 7180 to instruct processing contents. In addition, the main control unit 7140 to each sub control unit 7150,
Data is transmitted to 7160, 7170, and 7180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 7140 to 7180 has a power receiving board 7128 connected to the main power supply 7129.
To the power supply unit 7127 and further to the power supply relay board 71
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 7121.

The main controller 7140 has a 16-switch relay board 7031, a relay board 7200, a specific entrance detection switch 7027, a frame external terminal board 7122,
The frame relay board 7200b is connected. A 16-connection ball detection switch 702 is provided on the 16-switch relay board 7031.
5a is connected and the 16 consecutive ball detection switches 7025a
Is transmitted to the main control unit 7140. Note that the main control unit 7140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 7807 outside the gaming machine. In particular,
The configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 78, on the relay board 7200, as shown in FIG. 80, the guide symbol operation gate passage detection switch 7016a, the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 7019a, and the accessory object guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 7022a , Character actuation port (score increase device activation port) ball entry detection switch 7023c, character actuation port (specific entry port) solenoid 7021c, accessory actuation port (score increase device activation port)
A solenoid 7023d, a board external terminal board 7032, and the like are connected. The accessory operation port (specific entry port) solenoid 7021c is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 7021a and 7021b of the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 7021. The accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) solenoid 7023d includes
023 is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 7023a and 7023b. The board external terminal board 7032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 78, frame external terminal board 7122
Is connected to a tank ball out detection switch 7104, a door switch 7202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 7150. The frame relay board 7200b includes a supply ball out detection switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control section (prize ball control section) 7150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control section 7140, and includes a memory clear switch board 7191,
Ball lending counting sensor 7192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 7013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 7
194, a CR operation board 7195, a prize ball motor sensor board 7196, a launching apparatus control board 7201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 7191 is a switch board for clearing all various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 7192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 7013 to rent a ball. A sensor for counting the number, a prize ball flow switching solenoid 7194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 7109. A CR operation board 7195 is a board for inputting and outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards to and from a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 7013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 7196 relates to award ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 7297.

The launching device control board 7201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 78, the symbol display device control section 716
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor). These operation circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 7140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 79, the symbol display device control unit 7160 is connected to a judgment symbol display device board 7017d having a display panel, and the CPU operates the guidance increasing device by using the control program stored in the ROM with the RAM as a work area. The operation control of the judgment symbol display device (display panel) 7018 (that is, the display control of the display device) is performed. Although the main controller 7140 controls the display of the incoming symbol display device 7025, the display control can be performed by the symbol display device controller 7160.

Returning to FIG. 78, the lamp output device control unit 71
70 is an arithmetic circuit component (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output port, etc.) similar to the symbol display device control unit 7160
And a main control unit 71 at the input / output port.
40. Lamp output device control unit 7170
, An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, etc., similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 78, audio output device control section 718
Numeral 0 includes the same arithmetic circuit components (CPU, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown) as the symbol display device control unit 7160,
The input / output port is connected to the main control unit 7140. An audio relay board 1203 similar to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 7180,
A volume switch board 1012 connected to the voice relay board 1203 sets an output volume in response to operation of a volume switch (not shown), and outputs various sounds, sounds, and the like from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game. Is done.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 7380 are provided with symbol display. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of the reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 7160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 7140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 7170 or the sound output device control unit 7180 as an operation command target.

The symbol display device control unit 716 described above
0, the lamp output device control unit 7170 and the audio output device control unit 7180 are the main control unit 7140 and the frame control unit 7150
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Next, the electronic control unit 713 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 7001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 7140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 70
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

A judgment symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG. 81 as a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG.
0) is performed separately. In addition, the accessory port (specific entrance)
Based on the ball entering 7021 (that is, detection by the specific ball entrance detection switch 7027 (see FIG. 77 or 78)), a similarity determination job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed.
Further, a random number for symbol determination and a random number for reach mode determination are obtained, which are not deviated from each other.
82 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, based on the passage of a game ball to the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 7021, the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 70
At 18, the variable display of each symbol (in this case, a three-digit hit / fail determination symbol) is started. Next, in S622, referring to the pass / fail result obtained in the above-described pass / fail judgment job,
In the case of a hit determination ("1") (S623: YES), S
Proceeding to 632, the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is read, and further proceeding to S633, the jackpot number similarly determined by the random number is read, and proceeding to S631, for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol are made the same symbol. After a predetermined reach display mode after being aligned, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol and the middle symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, in which the off-reach symbol number determined by the random number and the off-right symbol number are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation determination ("3") (S625), the flow advances to S626 to read out each of the deviated symbol numbers determined by the random numbers, and the flow advances to S627 to shift the determined symbols to each other. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. It should be noted that, even in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes, such as delaying the variable display time of only one symbol.

The display mode determined by such a symbol display job (S620) is output from the main control unit 7140 to the symbol display device control unit 7160 at a predetermined time interval as corresponding command data (command signal). Then, the symbol display device control unit 7160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data.
The symbol display device control unit 7160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by obtaining a random number or the like), the display control in the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 7160.

The display job of the guide symbol in the guide symbol display device 7017 is performed in substantially the same manner as the above-mentioned judgment symbol display job. Since there is no reach display in the guide symbol display device 7017, in the case of a hit determination, the big hit number is read and the left and right symbols are stopped and displayed,
Further, in the case of a departure determination, the left and right symbol numbers are read out and stop display is performed respectively.

In the pachinko machine 7001 according to the present embodiment, based on the type of symbol stopped and displayed on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 by the big hit determination,
After the end of the special game state, there is provided a probability changing means for changing (improving) the probability (small hit probability) of the symbol hit determination until the next big hit. Specifically, the above-mentioned jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in advance is configured from a random number value for probability change and a random number value for non-probability change, and a symbol for probability change (for example, "7, 7, 7]) or a symbol for non-probability change (for example," 2, 2, 2 ") is stopped and displayed when the symbol for probability change is stopped and displayed, after the end of the special game state. The probability of the success / failure determination (big hit probability) is improved to about 4 to 5 times the normal hit until the next big hit.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 7001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 7016, the guide symbol display device 70
17 is activated to start variable display. It should be noted that, while the guide symbol display device 7017 is operating, the game balls are moved to the respective operation gates 7016.
, Up to four can be stored, and one to four guide symbol operation storage and display devices 7017c light up and display according to the storage.

In the guide symbol display device 7017, when the symbol is fixedly displayed in a predetermined specific display mode (for example, the same symbol on the left and right such as "7" and "7"), the accessory operation port (specific entry port) ) The entrance of 7021 has a relatively high probability of 0.5 seconds when the jackpot probability (acceptance probability) of the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 is relatively low, and a relatively high probability (so-called probable change). Release for 5.8 seconds. The game ball that has entered the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 7021 is temporarily stored in the storage unit 7029 through the guide gutter 7026,
It falls and is detected by the specific entrance detection switch 7027 and enters the recess 7028 a of the rotating body 7030.

When the specific entrance opening detection switch 7027 detects a game ball, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 starts variable display. When the symbol is determined and displayed in a specific display mode (hit display mode) on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018,
The guiding device 7028 guides the game ball to the increasing device operating region 70
When the game is guided to 28b and the game ball is detected by the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 7019a (see FIG. 80), the guidance increase device (main control unit 7140) is activated, and a special game state is generated. When the symbol is determined and displayed in the off-display mode on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018, the guidance device 7028 guides the game ball to the stored ball discharge port 7028c.

The above are the game modes related to the normal game state. The guide symbol operation gate 7016, the guide symbol display device 7017, the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 7021, the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 7018, Guiding device 702
8 functions as a gaming device group for the first gaming mode (normal gaming state). Note that the first game mode gaming device group can be regarded as a special game generating game device group for generating a special game state.

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when a game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 7022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 702 is activated.
3 is opened for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 7023, the eleventh, thirteenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth numbers of the entry symbol display device 7025 are lit and displayed, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The eleventh, the thirteenth, the fourteenth, and the fifteenth correspond to the entrances of the 16 consecutive entrances 7024 which are relatively difficult to enter. Note that this special game state is repeatedly performed with a maximum of 14 unit games, and the unit game is
The game ball reaches the turn or the guide increase device operating area 7028
The processing is terminated by either of the above cases. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guidance device operation gate 7022 and the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 7023 are a game device group for the second game mode (special game state). It is functioning.

Thus, the pachinko machine 700 of this embodiment
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, the game ball that has entered the character object operation port (specific ball entry port) 7021 is guided to the guidance device 7028 through the guidance gutter 7026, and based on the display mode of the guidance increase device operation determination symbol display device 7018, Since the guiding device 7028 is configured to operate, the gaming device has a novel configuration that has never been seen before. In addition, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7
Probability changing means for changing the symbol success / failure probability (big hit probability) in the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7018 after the end of the special game state based on the type or combination of the big hit symbols determined and displayed at 018. Because
In terms of whether it is confirmed and displayed with a symbol for probability change,
It is possible to give a high entertainment interest to the player.

Hereinafter, a modification of the structure of the game board 7010 in the pachinko machine 7001 will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that gaming devices not particularly described are assumed to have the same configuration as the above-described embodiment.

In the modification of FIG. 82, as a group of gaming machines for the first game mode (normal gaming state), a guide symbol operating gate 7416 is provided on the left half surface side from the center of the game area 7011, and the guide symbol display device is provided. 7417 is a game area 701
1 is a guide symbol operation gate 74 on the left half side from the center of
Above 16, the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 7421 is located substantially at the center of the game area 7011, and the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7418 is on the left half side of the game area 7011 and is the guidance symbol operation gate 7416. In the lower part of the drawing, the guidance increase device operation area 7419 is provided with a special object operation port (specific ball entry port) 7421.
, Respectively.

[0493] Furthermore, the second game mode (special game state)
As a group of gaming devices
However, a bonus item operation port (score increasing device operation port) 7423 is located on the right half surface side from the center of the game area 7011, and is located below the right half surface side of the game area 7011 from the center of the game area 7011. , Respectively.

The guide symbol display device 7417 includes a left symbol display region 7417a, a middle symbol display region 7417b, and a right symbol display region 7417c. The guide increase device operation determination symbol display device 7418 also includes the left symbol display region 7418.
a, middle symbol display area 7418b, right symbol display area 741
8c.

The accessory operating port (specific ball entry port) 7421 includes a pair of movable pieces 7421a and 7421b.
The guiding device 7 capable of guiding the game ball entered by opening (opening) the 421a and 7421b from the guiding increasing device operating region guiding portion 7420b to the guiding increasing device operating region 7419.
428. The guiding device 7428 is constituted by a rotating body substantially similar to the embodiment shown in FIG. 77, but a number determination symbol for randomly selecting the maximum number of continuous special game states is provided at the center of the rotating body front side. Display device (lottery device) 7
431 are provided. In the pachinko machine equipped with the game board configuration of this modification, a plurality of types of the maximum number of times of the special game state are determined, and the lottery is performed by the number determination symbol display device 7431 for the maximum number of times of the special game. I have. Specifically, the maximum number of continuations is two or one.
The number is set to four, and the numbers from "1" to "9" are displayed on the number-of-times determination symbol display device 7431. "3" or "7" is displayed on the number-of-times determination symbol display device 7431.
Is determined and displayed, the maximum number of continuations is 14 times, and when the number is confirmed and displayed with other numbers, the maximum number of continuations is 2 times. This number determination symbol display device 7431 is
The operation is started when the game ball passes through the guidance increasing device operation area (number-of-times determination symbol display device operation gate) 7419. In addition, it is also possible to dispose an openable and closable plate in the forward direction of the game area 7011, and to open the accessory operation port (specific ball entrance) 7421 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

Hereinafter, a game mode of a pachinko machine having the above-described game board configuration will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 7416, the guide symbol display device 7417 operates to start variable display. In the guide symbol display device 7417, when the symbol is fixedly displayed in a predetermined specific display mode (for example, the same three-digit symbol such as "7", "7", "7"), the accessory operation port (specific ball entry) Mouth) 742
1 is opened for a predetermined time. A game ball that has entered the role object operation port (specific ball entrance) 7421 is detected by the specific ball entrance detection switch 7427 and the guiding device 74.
Are stored in the 28 storage sections 7428a. However, when a game ball is stored in the storage portion 7428a (the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device is being operated), a game ball newly entering the character object operation port (specific ball entrance) 7421 is stored. It is guided to the ball outlet 7420c.

When the specific ball entrance detection switch 7427 detects a game ball, the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7418 starts variable display. When the symbol is determined and displayed in a specific display mode (hit display mode) on the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7418,
The guiding device 7428 guides the stored game balls from the guiding increasing device operating region guiding portion 7428b to the guiding increasing device operating region 7419. Guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 70 provided in guidance increase device operation area 7419
When a game ball is detected at 19a (see FIG. 80),
The guidance increasing device (main control unit 7140) is operated to generate a special game state, and the number determination symbol display device 743.
1 starts variable display. Number judgment symbol display device 743
The maximum number of times the special game state is continued is determined based on the symbol confirmed and displayed in 1. For example, when “3” and “7” are confirmed and displayed, a maximum of 14 unit games is set as an upper limit, and other symbols are used. When the confirmation display is made, the special game state is continued with a maximum of two unit games as an upper limit. Note that, when the symbol is determined and displayed in the display mode in the guidance increasing device operation determination symbol display device 7418, the guidance device 7428 guides the game ball to the stored ball discharge port 7428c.

[0498] The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, in which the guide symbol operation gate 7416, the guide symbol display device 7417, the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 7421, the storage section (storage device) 7428a, the guidance increase. The device operation determination symbol display device 7418, the guidance device 7428, and the number-of-times determination symbol display device 7431 function as a gaming device group for the first game mode (normal gaming state). Note that the first game mode gaming device group can be regarded as a special game generating game device group for generating a special game state.

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increasing device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 7422, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 742.
3 is opened for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 7423, the numbers 11, 13, 14, and 15 of the entry symbol display device 7025 light up and display the game (unit game). The points earned during the game will be doubled. The eleventh, the thirteenth, the fourteenth, and the fifteenth correspond to the entrances of the 16 consecutive entrances 7024 which are relatively difficult to enter. In addition, this special game state is twice or 1
The unit game is repeatedly performed with four unit games as the upper limit, and the number of times the unit game is selected by the type or combination of the symbols fixedly displayed on the number-of-times determining symbol display device 7431 (that is, 2 times)
Or 14 times) or the game ball passes into the guidance increasing device operating area 7419. The above is the gaming mode according to the special gaming state, and the accessory guiding device operation gate 7422 and the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 7423 are a gaming device group for the second gaming mode (special gaming state). It is functioning.

[0500] Note that the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port)
When the unit game related to the opening of the 7423 is completed, or when a game ball enters the bonus item operation port (score increase device operation port) 7423, the special item operation port (score increase device operation port) 7
Reference numeral 423 is used to end the opening operation. Also,
Accessory opening for a single item during one unit game (operating opening for score increase device)
When a game ball enters 7423, even if the game ball further passes through the operation guide device operation gate 7422 during the unit game, the operation hole (score increasing device operation port) 7423
Does not perform the opening operation during the unit game. In addition to the operation of the guidance increasing device (during the occurrence of the special game state), the game ball is operated by the accessory guidance device operating gate 7422.
Even if you pass through, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 74
Reference numeral 23 does not perform the opening operation.

The pachinko machine 70 according to the eighth embodiment is described above.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the display device for determining the operation of the guidance increasing device can be displayed by a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal (LCD). What is necessary is just a device which can be guided to two or more areas.

(Ninth Embodiment) Next, as a ninth embodiment,
The structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 8001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The front part of the pachinko machine 8001 of the ninth embodiment has the same main body frame, middle frame, front frame, and upper plate as the front part of the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. , A lower plate, and a locking device (illustration and detailed description omitted). First, the game board 8 formed on the front part
The surface structure 010 will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The game board 8010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, is held by a middle frame (1003: see FIG. 22), and its back side is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). The game board 8010 includes a game board 80
A substantially circular game area 8011 is formed by an outer rail (not shown) and an inner rail (not shown) provided on the surface of the game machine 10, and a guide symbol actuation ball as a start detection device is provided in the game area 8011. Mouth 8016a and guidance symbol operation gates 8016b and 8016c, guidance symbol display device 8017 as a variable display device, accessory operation port 8018 as a first variable ball entry device, and first accessory guidance device as a specific detection device An actuation gate 8026, an accessory operation port (specific entry port) 8021 as a second variable entry device, a prize increase entry port 8027 as a first prize mode increasing device, and a detection device for an accessory actuation device Second character guidance device operation gate 8022
And an accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 8023 as a second prize mode increasing device, a 16 consecutive entering ball opening 8024 in which 16 entry areas are arranged adjacent to each other, and a 16 consecutive entering ball A ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 8025 for lighting and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry region of the mouth 8024;
Many obstacle nails (not shown) and the like are provided.

The guide symbol operation entrance 8016a is located substantially at the center of the game area 8011, and the guide symbol display device 801 is provided.
7, and is arranged above the display device 8017,
A ball entry detection switch 8016d (see FIG. 84) is provided inside. In addition, the guide symbol operation gates 8016b, 80
16c are disposed below the center of the game area 8011 on both left and right sides, respectively, and include a ball entry (pass) detection switch 8016d (see FIG. 84). When a game ball is detected by the ball detection switch 8016d,
In the guide symbol display device 8017, variable display of a plurality of symbols is started.

[0505] The guide symbol display device 8017 has a game area 8
011 arranged in the approximate center, three display areas, namely a left symbol display area 8017a, a middle symbol display area 8017b,
A right symbol display area 8017c is provided, and a plurality of symbols can be variably stopped and displayed. In the guide symbol display device 8017, for example, the symbol is “7, 7,
When the stop display (confirmation display) is completed with the same three digits of the symbol "7", the accessory operating port 8018 is opened.

The accessory operation port 8018 is provided in the game area 8011.
Is located at the upper center, and one opening / closing plate 8018a
When the opening / closing plate 8018a is operated (opened) in the forward direction of the game area 8011, the open state is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. In addition, an accessory actuation port entrance ball detection switch 8018c (see FIG. 86) is provided inside,
When a game ball is detected by the ball detection switch 8018c, one or a plurality of pieces of identification information in the ball entry symbol display device 8025 are lit and displayed. Specifically, the display is turned on including identification information corresponding to the ball entry area where entry of the obstacle is relatively difficult. It is also possible to arrange a pair of movable pieces in the accessory operating port and open the accessory operating port 8018 based on the operation (opening) of the movable pieces to the left and right.

[0507] The first accessory guidance device operating gate 8026 is
It is arranged above the left half surface side from the center of the game area 8011, and includes a first accessory guidance device operating gate passage detection switch 8026a (see FIG. 86) inside. When a game ball is detected by the operation gate passage detection switch 8026a, the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 8021 is opened.

The accessory operation port (specific entrance) 8021 is located substantially at the center of the game area 8011 and is located on the guide symbol display device 80.
17 and a pair of movable pieces 8021
a, 8021b, and the movable pieces 8021a, 8021
By operating (opening) b in the left-right direction of the game area 8011, the ball is relatively advantageous for entering the ball.
Note that the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 8021 of the present embodiment.
Are integrated with the guide symbol display device 8017 and the guide symbol operation entrance 8016a to form a center accessory. In the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 8021, a guidance increasing device operation area 8020b and a guidance increase device non-operation area 8020c, 8020c are provided, and the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 8021 is provided. The game ball that has entered the ball is to enter one of the above-described guidance increasing device operating region 8020b and the guiding increasing device non-operation region 8020c, 8020c. In addition, it is also possible to arrange an openable and closable plate in the front direction of the game area 8011, and to open the accessory operating port (specific ball entrance) 8021 based on the operation of the openable and closable plate.

The guidance increasing device operating area 8020b is disposed between the guidance increasing device non-operating areas 8020c and 8020c, and includes an induction increasing device operating area passage detection switch 8019a (see FIG. 86). When a game ball is detected by the detection switch 8019a, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry symbol display device 8025 is lit and displayed, and the guidance increasing device is activated. When activated, a special gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The guidance increasing device mainly includes a main control unit 8140 (see FIG. 84) and refers to a special device that changes a game state.

[0510] The second accessory guidance device operating gate 8022 is
It is arranged above the right half side from the center of the game area 8011,
Inside the second accessory guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 8
022a (see FIG. 86). During the occurrence of the special game state, the second accessory guidance device operating gate 80
When the game ball is detected by the 22 detection switch 8022a, the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 8023 is opened.

[0511] Accessory opening (scoring increase device opening) 802
3 is disposed on the right half side from the center of the game area 8011 and below the second accessory guidance device operating gate 8022, and includes one opening / closing plate 8023a.
Based on the actuation (opening) of 3a in the forward direction of the game area 8011, an open state that is advantageous for the player to enter the ball is provided. In addition, the inside of the accessory actuation opening ball detection switch 8023
c (see FIG. 86), and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 8023c, predetermined identification information (identification information corresponding to a ball entry area where entry is generally difficult) of the entry ball symbol display device 8025 is lit. At the same time, the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) is activated. It should be noted that a pair of movable pieces that can be opened and closed in the left and right direction of the game area 8011 are provided, and based on the operation of the movable pieces, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 8.
023 can be in an open state.

[0512] The 16 consecutive entry ports 8024 are connected to the game area 801.
1 is provided at the lowermost portion, and an incoming symbol display device (identification information display device) 8025 is provided in front of the lowermost portion.
A 16 consecutive ball detection switch 8025a (see FIG. 84) is provided inside each of the 16 continuous ball entrances 8024, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 8025a, a ball corresponding to the ball entering area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 8025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 8001, the launching of 16 game balls is set as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on a combination of the identification information illuminated and displayed on the 16 game balls. For example, when four consecutive numeral lamps are continuously displayed, a score of 1 is given, and 16 prize balls or medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. Note that the ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 8025 can be, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) display. In this case, the detection switch 8
When a game ball is detected at 025a, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, or a liquid crystal (LC) of a ball entry pattern display device (identification information display device) 8025 corresponding to the ball entry area is detected.
D) The identification information (number) is displayed on the display screen.

[0513] The prize increase entrance 8027 is located in the game area 801.
1 is arranged on the left half side from the center, and a prize increase entrance detection switch 8027a (see FIG. 86) is provided inside. The prize increase entrance entrance detection switch 802
By detecting the game ball in 7a, a further prize (score) is added to the prize (score) obtained during the normal game state in which the special game state does not occur (that is, the guidance increasing device is not operated). It is assumed.

Next, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 8001 will be described with reference to the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 8130 of the pachinko machine 8001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 8130 includes a main control unit 8140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 8 connected to the main control unit 8140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 8160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 8170 and an audio output device control unit (audio control unit) 8180. The main control unit 8140 includes a main control board 8340
And the above four control units 81 other than the main control unit 8140
Reference numerals 50, 8160, 8170, and 8180 are respectively configured as sub-control units, and a prize ball control board (frame control board) 8350, a symbol display device control board 8360, a lamp output device control board 8370, and an audio output device control board, which are sub-control boards. 8380.

[0516] The main control board 8340 includes the CP shown in FIG.
U1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 14
The control program stored in the ROM 1482 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 8001 (that is, the basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Returning to FIG. 84, the main control unit 8140 sends command data, which is a command signal, to each of the sub-control units 8150, 8160, 8170, 8180 to instruct processing contents. In addition, the main control unit 8140 to each sub control unit 8150,
Data is transmitted to 8160, 8170, and 8180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 8140 to 8180 has a power receiving board 8128 connected to the main power supply 8129.
To the power supply unit 8127 and further to the power supply relay board 81
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on, which will be described later, is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 8121.

The main controller 8140 is connected to a 16-switch switch relay board 8031, a relay board 8200, a guide symbol operating port (gate) entry (detection) switch 8016d, a frame external terminal board 8122, and a frame relay board 8200b. Have been. A 16-connection ball detection switch 8025a is connected to the 16-connection switch relay board 8031, and a detection signal from the 16-connection ball detection switch 8025a is transmitted to the main control unit 814.
Sent to 0. Note that the main control unit 8140 is provided with an information output unit for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 8807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 84, as shown in FIG. 86, on the relay board 8200,
8c, guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 8019
a, first accessory guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 80
26a, prize increase entrance entrance detection switch 8027a, second object guidance device operation gate passage detection switch 8022
a, Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) ball entry detection switch 8023c, Accessory operation port solenoid 8018d, Accessory operation port (specific entry port) solenoid 8021c, Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) A solenoid 8023d, a board external terminal board 8032, and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port solenoid 8018d is a solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 8018a of the accessory actuation port 8018. The movable object operating port (specific entrance port) solenoid 8021c is a movable piece 8
021a and 8021b. Actuator opening (scoring increase device opening) solenoid 80
23d is an accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 8023
Is a solenoid for opening the opening / closing plate 8023a. The board external terminal board 8032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Returning to FIG. 84, frame external terminal substrate 8122
Is connected to a tank ball exhaustion detection switch 8104, a door switch 8202, and the like.
Are also connected to the frame control unit 8150. On the frame relay board 8200b, a supply ball out detection switch 1108 and a prize ball counting sensor 119 similar to those of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197, etc. are connected.

The frame control unit (prize ball control unit) 8150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 8140, and includes a memory clear switch board 8191,
Ball lending counting sensor 8192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 8013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 8
194, a CR operation board 8195, a prize ball motor sensor board 8196, a launching apparatus control board 8201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 8191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on. The ball lending counting sensor 8192 uses the CR unit (prepaid card unit) 8013 to rent the ball. A sensor for counting the number, a prize ball flow switching solenoid 8194 is a solenoid for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 8109. A CR operation board 8195 is a board for inputting / outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards with a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 8013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 8196 relates to a prize ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 8297.

The launching device control board 8201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 84, the symbol display device control unit 816
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (video display processor). These operation circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 8140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 85, a guide symbol display device board 8017d having a display panel is connected to the symbol display device control unit 8160, and the CPU uses a control program stored in the ROM to set the guide symbol display device using the RAM as a work area. The operation control of the (display panel) 8017 (that is, the display control of the display device) is performed. The display control of the entry symbol display device 8025 is assumed to be performed by the main control unit 8140,
This display control can also be performed by the symbol display device control unit 8160.

[0524] The lamp output device control unit 8170 has the same arithmetic circuit components (CP) as the symbol display device control unit 8160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.), and are connected to the main controller 8140 at the input / output ports. An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, and the like, similar to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27, are connected to the lamp output device control unit 8170.

[0525] The audio output device control unit 8180 has the same arithmetic circuit component (CP) as the symbol display device control unit 8160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown), and are connected to the main control unit 8140 at the input / output ports. An audio relay board 1203 similar to that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 8180, and a volume switch board 1012 connected to the audio relay board 1203 is
The output volume is set in accordance with the operation of a volume switch (not shown), and various sounds and sounds are output from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 8380 are provided with a symbol display. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of the reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 8160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 8140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 8170 or the sound output device control unit 8180 as an operation command target.

[0527] The symbol display device control unit 816 described above.
0, the lamp output device control unit 8170 and the audio output device control unit 8180 are the main control unit 8140 and the frame control unit 8150
And a circuit section similar to the above. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Next, the electronic control unit 813 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 8001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 8140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 80
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

A guide symbol display job (S62) shown in FIG. 87 as a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG.
0) is performed separately. In addition, the guide symbol operation entrance 801
6a or a ball entering the guide symbol operation gates 8016b and 8016c (that is, detection by the guide symbol operation port entrance (gate passage) detection switch 8016d), a similarity determination job as in the second embodiment is performed, and furthermore, Then, the random number for symbol determination and the random number for reach mode determination are obtained, and the results are stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, the guide symbol operation entrance 8016a or the guide symbol operation gate 8016
The variable display of each symbol (in this case, a three-digit guidance symbol) is started on the guidance symbol display device 8017 based on the entry (passing) of a game ball into b, 8016c. Then
In S622, the hit / fail judgment result obtained in the hit / fail judgment job is referred to, and in the case of the hit judgment ("1"), (S62)
3: YES), proceed to S632, read the reach mode determination value determined by the random number, further proceed to S633, read the jackpot number similarly determined by the random number, proceed to S631, for example, left symbol and middle After aligning the symbols with the same symbol and passing through a predetermined reach display mode, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol and the middle symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

[0531] On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, where the off-reach symbol number determined by the random number and the off-right symbol number are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation determination ("3") (S625), the flow advances to S626 to read out each symbol number determined by the random number, and the flow advances to S627 to shift the respective guide symbols to each other. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. It should be noted that, even in the case of the normal deviation determination, the display mode can be changed to various modes, such as delaying the variable display time of only one symbol.

The guide symbol display job (S62)
The display mode determined in 0) is output from the main control unit 8140 to the symbol display device control unit 8160 as a corresponding command data (command signal) at a predetermined time interval, and
The symbol display device control unit 8160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data. The symbol display device control unit 8160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. By selecting from among them (can be selected by random number acquisition or the like), the display control in the guide symbol display device 8017 can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 8160.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 8001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. A game ball is a guide symbol operation entrance 8016a or a guide symbol operation gate 8016.
The guide symbol display device 8017 operates when the ball enters or passes through any of b and 8016c. Guidance symbol display device 80
When the predetermined combination of symbols is fixedly displayed on 17, the opening / closing plate 8018a of the accessory operation port 8018 is opened for a predetermined time. The opening time varies depending on the combination of the above-mentioned symbols. If the same symbol (“7”, “7”, “7”, etc.) is determined and displayed with an odd number of three digits, it is 2.5 seconds, three digits including “7” When an odd symbol ("3", "5", "7", etc.) is confirmed and displayed, it is opened for 0.3 seconds. When a game ball enters the above-mentioned accessory operation port 8018, the fifth of the entry symbol display device 8025,
No. 8 lights up. Nos. 5 and 8 correspond to the 16 consecutive entry openings 8024 which are difficult to enter.

On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first accessory guidance device operating gate 8026, the accessory operating port (specific entry port) 8
The movable pieces 8021a and 8021b of No. 21 are opened for a predetermined time. When a game ball enters the role object operation port (specific ball entrance) 8021, the game ball is guided to one of the guidance increase device operation region 8020b and the guidance increase device non-operation region 8020c, 8020c. Here, the game ball is moved to the guidance increasing device operating area 80.
When the ball enters 20b and is detected by the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 8019a (see FIG. 86), the guidance increase device (main control unit 8140) is activated, and a special game state is generated. This guidance increasing device is supposed to operate continuously up to a maximum of 14 unit games (14 games).
017 middle symbol display area 8017b, right symbol display area 8
017c, and displays the number of remaining rights at the start of the next unit game (game). Therefore, the guide symbol display device 8017 has a function as a right count display device.

In the normal game state in which the special game state does not occur, when a game ball enters the prize increase entrance 8027, if a score is obtained during the unit game (game), the score is further increased. One point is added. It should be noted that this added score is not subject to a doubled score in a special game state described later.

[0537] The game mode according to the normal game state has been described above. The guide symbol operation entrance 8016a, the guide symbol operation gates 8016b and 8016c, the guide symbol display device 801.
7. The accessory operation port 8018 and the prize increase entrance 8027 are the first
Functions as a group of gaming devices for the above-mentioned gaming mode (normal gaming state). Also, the first accessory guidance device operation gate 802
6. The accessory operation port (specific entrance) 8021 and the guidance increase device operation area 8020b function as a game apparatus group for the second game mode (for generating a special game).

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increase device, that is, during the special game state, the game ball is moved to the second accessory guidance device operation gate 802.
When passing through 2, the accessory opening (scoring device activation opening) 8
023 is opened for a predetermined time second. When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 8023, the numbers 8, 9, 12, and 13 of the entry symbol display device 8025 light up and display, and the game (unit game) The points earned during the game will be doubled. The eighth, ninth, twelfth, and thirteenth correspond to the entrances of the 16 consecutive entrances 8024 which are difficult to enter. This special game state is repeatedly performed with the unit game of 14 times as an upper limit, and ends when the unit game reaches 14 times or the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 8020b. The above is the gaming mode according to the special gaming state, in which the second accessory guiding device operating gate 8022, the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 80
23 functions as a gaming device group for a third gaming mode (special gaming state). It should be noted that the upper limit at which the special game state continues may be selected by lottery. For example, a display device for determining the number of times of operation of the guidance increasing device is provided in the game area 8011, and a region for operating the guidance increasing device 8020b
, The maximum number of times the special game state is continued can be determined based on the symbol fixedly displayed on the number-of-times determining symbol display device after the ball enters the game.

[0539] As described above, the pachinko machine 800 of this embodiment is used.
In 1, the various game devices are divided into specific groups, and a plurality of game modes can be enjoyed.
In particular, in the guide symbol display device 8017, if the probability that the specific display mode to be hit is definitely displayed is increased, the rate at which the accessory operating port 8018 changes to a state that is relatively advantageous to the player is also increased. The prize can be easily obtained, and the player's willingness to play in the normal state can be reduced. In addition, since the prize increase entrance 8027 for increasing the prize during the normal state is provided, the game in the normal state is more varied, and it is possible to provide the player with a novel and novel entertainment interest. It is.

The pachinko machine 80 according to the ninth embodiment is described above.
Although the description has been made with respect to 01, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment can be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) can be a ball entry device. In addition, the guide symbol display device can display a 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal (LCD).

(Seventh Embodiment) Next, as a tenth embodiment, the structure of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine (also simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 9001 as a combination game machine will be described. It is to be noted that portions having configurations different from those of the second embodiment will be described, and portions having no description have the same configuration. In this case, particularly, the configuration of the game board is mainly different.

The pachinko machine 9 of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG.
001 has a main frame 9002, a middle frame 9003, a front frame 9004, an upper plate 9005, and a lower plate 9006 similar to those of the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. And a locking device 9007. A foul ball sensor 919 similar to that of the second embodiment.
7 is provided, which is the launcher unit 1008 (FIG. 2).
4) is a sensor for detecting a game ball that has not reached the game area 9011 and has returned to the lower plate portion 9006 from a shooting rail (not shown). Further, a launch ball count switch 9094 similar to that of the second embodiment.
This is a switch for counting the number of shot game balls fired, and the number of shot balls fired in the game area 9011 based on the detection information from the switch 9094 and the detection information from the foul ball sensor 9197. When (the number of effective firing balls) is counted as 16, one game (unit game) is ended.

Next, a game board 9010 formed on the front surface
The surface structure of will be described. The game board 9010 is a substantially rectangular wooden plate-like body, held by a middle frame 9003, and the back side of which is covered by a back mechanism board (1102: see FIG. 24). In the game board 9010, a substantially circular game area 9011 is formed by an outer rail 9010c and an inner rail 9010d provided on the surface of the game board 9010. In the game area 9011, a guide symbol operation as a start detection device is provided. A gate 9016, a guide symbol display device 9017 as a variable display device, an accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021 as a first variable entry device, and a guidance increasing device operation region using a game ball as a specific entry region. Guidance device that can be guided to 9019a (also referred to as a guidance accessory or distribution device)
9020a, an accessory actuating device operating gate 9026 as an accessory actuating detecting device, an accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023 as a second variable ball inputting device, and 16 input ball regions are mutually connected. 16 consecutive entry ports 902 arranged adjacent to each other
4, a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 9025 for illuminating and displaying identification information corresponding to each ball entry area of the 16 consecutive ball entrances 9024, and a large number of obstacle nails (not shown) are provided. ing.

The guide symbol operation gate 9016 is arranged above the left half side from the center of the game area 9011, and has a guide symbol operation entrance ball (gate passage) detection switch 901 inside.
6d (see FIG. 89). When a game ball is detected by the incoming ball (pass) detection switch 9016d,
In the guide symbol display device 9017, variable display of a plurality of symbols is started.

[0545] The guide symbol display device 9017 is connected to the game area 9
It is arranged on the left half side of the center of 011 and below the guide symbol operation gate 9016, and includes, for example, three display areas, that is, a left symbol display area, a middle symbol display area, and a right symbol display area (not shown), A plurality of symbols can be variably stopped and displayed. Guide symbol display device 90
In 17, for example, when the symbols are stopped and displayed together with the same symbol of “7, 7, 7” (fixed display), the accessory guiding device is activated, and the accessory operating port (specific entrance opening) 9021 is activated. Be released. Note that the accessory guiding device is mainly configured by the main control unit 9140 (see FIG. 89), and the state of the accessory operating port (specific entrance port) 9021 or the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023 described later. Means a special device that changes

[0546] The accessory operation port (specific entrance) 9021 is arranged at the upper center of the game area 9011 and has a pair of movable pieces 9021a and 9021b.
By operating (opening) 1a and 9021b to the left and right, an open state is provided which is advantageous for the player to enter the ball. Also,
Inside the accessory actuation opening ball detection switch 9021c (FIG. 91)
The ball detection switch 9021c
When a game ball is detected in, the entry into the guidance increase device operation area (specific entry area) 9019a described later becomes effective. An opening / closing plate may be provided at the accessory operating port 9021, and the accessory operating port 9021 may be opened based on the operation (opening) of the opening / closing plate in the front-rear direction of the game area 9011.

[0547] The game ball that has entered the role operating port (specific ball entry port) 9021 is guided by a center role or central device disposed below the role action port (specific ball input port) 9021. (Distribution device) 9020a. The guiding device 9020a is a concave accessory called a so-called crune, in which three holes are formed at the bottom, and one hole formed on the front side toward the game board 9010 is a guiding increasing device operating area 9019a. Thus, two holes formed on the back side are a non-operation area (non-specific ball-in area: a discharge port / area outside the operation area) 9019b. Here, when a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation region 9019a and is detected by the guidance increasing device operation region passage detection switch 9019d (see FIG. 91) provided therein, the guidance increasing device is activated and the normal operation is performed. A special game state that is relatively more advantageous to the player than the state occurs (also referred to as acquiring a special game right). Note that the guidance increasing device is a special device mainly configured by the main control unit 9140 (see FIG. 89) and changing a game state.

The accessory guidance device operating gate 9026 is arranged above the right half surface side from the center of the game area 9011, and has the accessory guidance device operating gate passage detection switch 9026 inside.
a (see FIG. 91). If a game ball is detected by the operation gate passage detection switch 9026a during the occurrence of the special game state, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 9023 is opened.

[0549] Accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 902
3 is disposed on the right half side from the center of the game area 9011 and below the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026,
A pair of movable pieces 9023a and 9023b are provided, and when the movable pieces 9023a and 9023b operate (open) in the left-right direction of the game area 9011, the player enters an open state that is advantageous for entering a ball. In addition, there is provided an accessory entry opening ball detection switch 9023c (see FIG. 91) inside, and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 9023c, predetermined identification information of the entry symbol display device 9025 (generally difficult to enter). The identification information corresponding to the large ball entry area) is lit and displayed, and the score increasing device (prize mode increasing device) operates. In addition, it is also possible to arrange a single opening / closing plate that can be opened in the front-rear direction of the game area 9011, and to open the accessory operation port (score increasing device operation port) 9023 based on the operation of the opening / closing panel. It is.

[0550] The 16 consecutive entry ports 9024 are connected to the game area 901.
1 is provided at the lowermost portion, and in front of it, a ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 9025 is provided.
Each of the 16 consecutive entry ball openings 9024 is provided with a 16 consecutive entry ball detection switch 9025a (see FIG. 89), and when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 9025a, the entry ball corresponding to the entry area is provided. The identification information (numerical lamp) of the symbol display device 9025 is lit on. In the pachinko machine 9001, the launch of 16 game balls is set as a unit game, and the prize mode is determined based on the combination of the identification information illuminated and displayed on the 16 games. For example, when four consecutive number lamps are displayed continuously, a score of 1 is awarded, and 16 prize balls or a considerable number of award medals are paid out for each point. In some cases, the score, the number of prize balls, or the number of award medals are accumulated in an IC card or the like. In addition,
The ball entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 9025 can be composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD). In this case, when a game ball is detected by the detection switch 9025a, The identification information (number) is displayed on the display screen of the 7-segment LED, dot matrix, or liquid crystal (LCD) of the entry symbol display device (identification information display device) 9025 corresponding to the entry area.

Next, regarding the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 9001, the pachinko machine 1001 of the second embodiment shown in FIG.
1 has the same structure as the back surface structure.

Next, the electronic control unit 9130 of the pachinko machine 9001 will be described with reference to FIG. First,
The electronic control unit 9130 includes a main control unit 9140 and a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 9 connected to the main control unit 9140.
150, symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit) 9160,
It is configured to include a lamp output device control unit (lamp control unit) 9170 and a sound output device control unit (sound control unit) 9180. The main control unit 9140 includes a main control board 9340
And the above four control units 91 other than the main control unit 9140
Reference numerals 50, 9160, 9170, and 9180 are each configured as a sub-control unit, and are a prize ball control substrate (frame control substrate) 9350, a symbol display device control substrate 9360, a lamp output device control substrate 9370, and an audio output device control substrate, which are sub-control substrates. 9380.

The main control board 9340 includes the CP shown in FIG.
U1401 and the CPU 1401 is a CPU core 14
The control program stored in the ROM 1482 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 9001 (ie, the basic progress control of the game) using the RAM 1481 as a work area. Further, the CPU 1401 plays a leading role in performing a control of determining whether or not the symbol is displayed in accordance with the determination program stored in the ROM 1482 (a determination unit).

Returning to FIG. 89, main control unit 9140 transmits command data, which is a command signal, for instructing the contents of processing to each of sub-control units 9150, 9160, 9170, and 9180. In addition, the main control unit 9140 to each sub-control unit 9150,
Data is transmitted to 9160, 9170, and 9180 in a one-way format. Each of the control units 9140 to 9180 has a power receiving board 9128 connected to the main power supply 9129.
To the power supply unit 9127 and further to the power supply relay board 91
Power is supplied via the power supply 21, and a system reset signal at power-on, which will be described later, is transmitted to all the control units via the power supply relay board 9121.

The main control section 9140 is connected to a 16-switch relay board 9031, a relay board 9200, a guide symbol operation port entrance (gate passing) detection switch 9016d, a frame external terminal board 9122, and a frame relay board 9200b. ing. The 16-connection ball detection switch 9025a is connected to the 16-connection switch relay board 9031, and a detection signal from the 16-connection ball detection switch 9025a is transmitted to the main control unit 914.
Sent to 0. Note that the main control unit 9140 is provided with an information output unit (not shown) for outputting game information (including control information) to a test device (inspection device) 9807 outside the gaming machine. Specifically, the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44.

Returning to FIG. 89, as shown in FIG.
1c, Guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch 9019
d, Accessory operation device gate passage detection switch 9026
a, Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) ball entry detection switch 9023c, Accessory operation port solenoid 9021d, Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) solenoid 9023d,
A board external terminal board 9032 and the like are connected. The accessory actuation port solenoid 9021d is a solenoid for opening and closing the movable pieces 9021a and 9021b of the accessory actuation port 9021. The accessory actuation port (score increase device actuation port) solenoid 9023d is provided with a role actor actuation port (score increase device actuation port) 9
This is a solenoid for opening the movable pieces 9023a and 9023b of No. 023. The board external terminal board 9032 is a terminal board for outputting various detection switch data and the like to the outside of the gaming machine.

Referring back to FIG. 89, the frame external terminal board 9122
Is connected to a prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 9150, a tank ball out detection switch 9104, a door switch 9202, and the like. The frame relay board 9200b has the same supply ball out detection switch 110 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
8, prize ball counting sensor 1198, lower tray full switch 1199, foul ball sensor 1197 and the like are connected.

The prize ball control unit (frame control unit) 9150 includes a CPU 1601 (see FIG. 36) similar to the main control unit 9140, and includes a memory clear switch board 9191,
Ball lending counting sensor 9192, CR unit (prepaid card unit) 9013, prize ball flow switching solenoid 9
194, CR operation board 9195, prize ball motor sensor board 9196, launching device control board 9201, and the like are connected. The memory clear switch board 9191 is a switch board for clearing all the various data remaining when the power is turned on, and the ball lending counting sensor 9192 uses a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 9013 to lend the ball lending. A sensor for counting the number and a prize ball flow path switching solenoid 9194 are solenoids for switching the flow path for ball lending and prize ball payout in the prize ball payout device 9109. A CR operation board 9195 is a board for inputting / outputting signals such as lending a ball and the number of remaining cards to / from a CR unit (prepaid card unit) 9013, and a prize ball motor sensor board 9196 relates to a prize ball payout. It is a sensor board for detecting the operation state of the prize ball motor 9297.

The launching device control board 9201 has the same ball feed solenoid relay board 1 as in the second embodiment shown in FIG.
092, a launch motor 1093, a launch ball count switch 1094, a launch stop switch 1009b, and a launch handle 1009 are connected.

Returning to FIG. 89, symbol display device control section 916
0 represents a CPU as an arithmetic circuit component (not shown);
It includes a RAM, a ROM, an input / output port, and a VDP (Video Display Processor). These arithmetic circuit components are mutually connected by a bus, and are connected to the main control unit 9140 at the input / output port. . As shown in FIG. 90, the symbol display device control unit 9160
Segment LED, dot matrix or liquid crystal (LC
Guide symbol display device substrate 9017d provided with display panel D)
And the incoming ball symbol display device substrate 9025d are connected, and the CP
U is RAM based on a control program stored in ROM.
Symbol display device (display panel) 90 with a work area
17 and an incoming symbol display device (identification information display device) 902
5 (ie, display control of the display device). As shown in FIG. 89, the symbol display device control unit 9160 includes a test device (inspection device) 9 outside the gaming machine.
807 is provided with an information output unit (not shown) for outputting game information (including control information). In particular,
The configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 43 and 44. Such an information output unit is provided in the first to ninth embodiments.
Can also be provided in the symbol display device control units 160, 1160 to 8160. Also, the incoming symbol display device 90
25 is controlled by the main control unit 9140 in each embodiment.
The display control may be performed by the symbol display device control unit 9160.

The lamp output device control section 9170 has the same arithmetic circuit component (CP) as the symbol display device control section 9160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.), and are connected to the main control unit 9140 at the input / output ports. An electric relay board 1171a, various LED boards, and the like, similar to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 27, are connected to the lamp output device control unit 9170.

The audio output device control section 9180 has the same arithmetic circuit component (CP) as the symbol display device control section 9160.
U, ROM, RAM, input / output ports, etc.) and a sound generator (not shown). The input / output ports are connected to the main controller 9140. An audio relay board 1203 similar to that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is connected to the audio output device control unit 9180, and a volume switch board 1012 connected to the audio relay board 1203 is
The output volume is set in accordance with the operation of a volume switch (not shown), and various sounds and sounds are output from the speaker 1400a in accordance with the progress of the game.

Further, various lamps such as a game effect lamp board (same as in the second embodiment) and a sound generator (same as in the second embodiment) mounted on the audio output device control board 9380 are designed to display symbols. The mode is controlled according to the variable / stop display mode of the symbol, the presence or absence of reach, the reach display mode, the special game mode, the game mode, and the like under the control of the device control unit 9160. The command signal of the control command is transmitted in one direction from the main control unit 9140 as a command signal for setting the lamp output device control unit 9170 or the sound output device control unit 9180 as an operation command target.

[0564] The symbol display device control unit 916 described above.
0, the lamp output device control unit 9170 and the audio output device control unit 9180 include the main control unit 9140 and the prize ball control unit 915.
It may be configured by a circuit unit similar to 0. That is, the ROM and the R are internally stored as shown in FIG.
A CPU with a built-in AM can also be used.

Next, the electronic control unit 913 shown in FIG.
The power supply path at 0 is the same as in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, regarding the operation of the pachinko machine 9001, the CPU 1401 of the main control unit 9140 (see FIG. 36)
The following description focuses on the processing executed by. Pachinko machine 90
31 is activated, the CPU 1401 executes an initial setting process, and thereafter, every time the timer is reset (in the case of the present embodiment, the reset cycle is 2.048 ms), the same as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. Repeat the main job of.

A guide symbol display job (S620) similar to that of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 87 is separately performed as a subroutine of the game job (S600) in FIG. In addition, based on the ball entry into the guide symbol operation gate 9016 (passing: that is, detection by the guide symbol operation port entry ball (gate passage) detection switch 9016d), a similarity determination job similar to that of the second embodiment is performed. Then, the random number for symbol determination and the random number for reach mode determination are obtained, and the results are stored in the RAM 1482 (see FIG. 36). First, in S621, based on the entry (passing) of a game ball into the guide symbol operation gate 9016, the guide symbol display device 9
In 017, variable display of each symbol (in this case, a three-digit guide symbol) is started. Next, in S622, referring to the pass / fail result obtained in the above-described pass / fail judgment job,
In the case of a hit determination ("1") (S623: YES), S
Proceeding to 632, the reach mode determination value determined by the random number is read, and further proceeding to S633, the jackpot number similarly determined by the random number is read, and proceeding to S631, for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol are made the same symbol. After a predetermined reach display mode after being aligned, the right symbol is aligned with the same symbol as the left symbol and the middle symbol, stopped and displayed, and fixed.

On the other hand, in the case of the off-reach determination ("2") (S624: YES), the flow proceeds to S628, where the off-reach symbol number and the off-right symbol number determined by the random numbers are read. Then, in S629, the read-out reach symbol number and the read-out right symbol number are compared, and the out-of-reach mode is determined based on the difference therebetween (S63).
0). Specifically, in S629, the difference between those numbers (that is, for example, the difference between the left symbol and the right symbol) is calculated, and based on the difference, the out-of-reach mode stored in the RAM 1481 (see FIG. 36) in advance. The reach mode data is read from the memory. For example, when the difference is “−1” (that is, for example, when the right symbol is the symbol immediately before the left symbol), one type is selected from a plurality of types (for example, three types) of outreach (for example, , Can be selected by obtaining a predetermined random number), and are read. After that, for example, after the left symbol and the middle symbol are arranged in the same symbol and a predetermined reach display mode is passed, the right symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the other symbols, and fixed.

In the case of a normal deviation judgment ("3") (S625), the flow proceeds to S626, where each deviation symbol number determined by the random number is read out, and the flow proceeds to S627, in which each guidance symbol is shifted from each other. Stop and display at the specified timing to confirm. In addition, in the case of the normal deviation determination, it is also possible to change the display mode to various modes, for example, after the first symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display time for the symbol in the next stop scheduled display area is set to be longer than usual. For example, it is possible to give the player the expectation of the reach display mode by making the display length longer (so-called sliding display).

[0570] Such a guide symbol display job (S62)
The display mode determined in 0) is output from the main control unit 9140 to the symbol display device control unit 9160 at a predetermined time interval as corresponding command data (command signal),
The symbol display device control unit 9160 performs display control by selecting a control mode within a designated range based on the command data. The symbol display device control unit 9160 stores a display pattern group including a plurality of display patterns corresponding to the command data, and displays the display pattern corresponding to the command data transmitted as the command signal in the display pattern group. The display control in the guide symbol display device 9017 can be arbitrarily selected from among them (can be selected by obtaining a random number or the like), and can be performed by the symbol display device control unit 9160.

Next, the game mode of the pachinko machine 9001 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, the game mode in the normal game state will be described. When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 9016, the guide symbol display device 901
7 is activated. When the predetermined symbol combination is fixedly displayed on the guide symbol display device 9017, the accessory guiding device (main control section 9140) is operated, and the movable piece 9021a of the accessory actuation opening (specific entrance opening) 9021 is operated. , 9021b are opened. Accessory operating port (specific entrance) 902 during opening operation
The opening is terminated when the game ball enters the ball 1 or after a predetermined number of (for example, two) unit games have elapsed. Note that when a game ball enters the accessory operation port 9021, the fifth and eighth numbers of the entry symbol display device 9025 are lit and displayed. Nos. 5 and 8 correspond to the 16 consecutive entry openings 9024 which are difficult to enter.

[0572] A game ball that has entered the accessory operating port (specific entrance port) 9021 is guided to one of the guidance increasing apparatus operating area 9019a and the guidance increasing apparatus non-operating area 9019b, 9019b. Here, when the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 9019a and is detected by the guidance increasing device operation region passage detection switch 9019d (see FIG. 91), the guidance increasing device (main control unit 9140) operates. A special game state occurs. This guidance increasing device is assumed to operate continuously up to a maximum of 14 unit games (14 games). The score obtained in each unit game is displayed on a score display device 9029 provided below the winning symbol display device 9025.

The above is the game mode related to the normal game state, in which the guide symbol operation gate 9016, the guide symbol display device 9017, the accessory operation port (specific entrance) 9021, the guide device 9020a, the guide increase device operation area 9019a. Is the first
Functions as a group of game devices for the above-mentioned game modes (for generating a special game).

Next, the game mode in the special game state will be described. During the operation of the guidance increase device, that is, during the special game state, when the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026, the accessory guiding device (main controller 9140) is activated, and the accessory operating port (score) is activated. The increase device operating port) 9023 is opened for a predetermined time. The opening operation is ended when a game ball enters the accessory operation port 9023 or when the unit game at the time of opening is ended. When a game ball enters the character object operation port (score increase device operation port) 9023, the No. 8, No. 9, No. 12, No.
The number 13 is lit and displayed, and the points obtained during the game (unit game) are doubled. The 8th, 9th,
The twelfth and thirteenth correspond to the 16 ball entry openings 9024 which are difficult to enter. This special game state is repeatedly performed with a maximum of 14 unit games, and the unit game is
The process ends when the game reaches the fourth time or when a game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 9019a. The above is the game mode according to the special game state, and the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026 and the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023 are a gaming machine group for the second game mode (special gaming state). It is functioning. It should be noted that the upper limit at which the special game state continues may be selected by lottery. For example, the guidance increase device operation number determination symbol display device is disposed in the game area 9011, and based on the symbol fixedly displayed on the number determination symbol display device after the game ball enters the guidance increase device operation region 9019a, The maximum continuation number of the special game state may be determined.

As described above, the pachinko machine 9 as the tenth embodiment is described.
Although 001 has been described, for example, the ball entry device of the above embodiment may be a pass gate (pass device), or the pass gate (pass device) may be a ball entry device. In addition, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, or a liquid crystal (LCD) can be used as the guide symbol display device.

A configuration that can be commonly added to each of the gaming machines (pachinko machines) of the first to tenth embodiments will be described below. The reference numerals and the like of the gaming machines are the same as those of the tenth embodiment unless otherwise specified. However, the other embodiments can be commonly used.

First, after the number of game balls that can be fired in a unit game (the maximum number of fired balls: for example, 16) is fired, an interval time of a predetermined time is provided before proceeding to the next unit game. (For example, 2 seconds). As the trigger of the start of the interval time, for example, after the launch of 16 game balls,
This can be done after all the gaming devices have finished operating (interval function). In this case, in the interval time from when 16 game balls are fired until the end of the game, a lamp (L
It is possible to notify the player by interval notifying means such as ED or the like or voice (21st mode). As such an interval notifying means, it is possible to provide a separate display device on the front of the gaming machine, or to notify by using a guide symbol display device (variable display device) 9017.

A shot ball count switch 9094 for detecting a shot ball generates a pulse signal which rises based on the detection of the shot as shown in FIG. 92, and the shot ball counting means 9094b based on the input of the pulse signal. When counting the number of shots, it is preferable to increase the pulse width of the pulse signal. This is because the number of fired balls is limited in a unit game, and since the firing is usually performed continuously and at a high speed (for example, 100 shots per minute), it is necessary to count the number of fired balls more accurately. It is. Therefore, by providing a pulse width increasing means 9094a for increasing the pulse width of the generated pulse signal between the fired ball counting switch 9094 and the fired ball counting means 9094b, the detection information can be surely recognized, and thus accurate firing can be performed. It may be possible to perform number counting (eighteenth aspect). Note that a multivibrator or the like can be used as the pulse width increasing means 9094a, for example. When a larger number of game media than the game media fired in the game area or the game media considered to be fired are detected by the ball entry detection means provided in the game area 9011, the excess A ball entry determining means for invalidating the ball entry can be provided (tenth aspect).

Guide display device (variable display device) 901
The guidance symbol operation gate (starting detection device) 9016, which is the trigger for the operation of 7, is operated while the guidance symbol display device 9017 is operating.
During the operation of the accessory guiding device, the passing (entering) of the game ball is invalidated, and the passing (entering) is not stored. In addition, a plurality (for example, three) of guide symbol operation gates (start detection devices) 9016 are provided in the game area 901.
1 can also be provided.

Guide display device (variable display device) 901
Reference numeral 7 indicates that, when a combination of symbols for which the accessory guiding device is to be operated is displayed, the display mode is continuously displayed until the operation of the accessory guiding device is completed. Note that, while the guide symbol display device (variable display device) 9017 is operating (during variable display), the unit game is not to be ended. In other words, when the guidance symbol display device (variable display device) 9017 is activated (variably displayed) after the 16th ball, which is the upper limit of the number of balls to be fired for a unit game, is fired, the job for ending the unit game (end) Process) is awaited.

[0591] The guide symbol display device (variable display device)
The trigger of the operation 9017 is based on the passing of the game ball to the guide symbol operation gate (start detection device) 9016. When the passage is detected, the count value of the shot ball counting means 9094b is referred to, and the guide symbol display device (variable display) A variation pattern (variable display pattern) displayed on the (device) 9017 can be selected (a twenty-second aspect). The variation pattern (variable display pattern) may include, for example, several patterns in which the variation display time (variable display time) from the start of the variation (variable) display of the symbol or the like to the final display is changed. For example, as in the variation pattern selection job shown in FIG. 93, when the passage of a game ball is detected by the guide symbol operation gate (start detection device) 9016 in S951, the number of shot balls fired in the unit game is confirmed in S952. I do. Specifically, the number of shooting balls is a predetermined number (for example, 10
Number) or not, and if less than the predetermined number, S954
In, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected. On the other hand, if the number is a predetermined number or more, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time is selected. The variable display (variable display) in the guide symbol display device (variable display device) 9017 is performed based on the selected variation pattern. Note that the above-described fluctuation pattern selection job is mainly performed by the main control unit 9140, but may be mainly performed by the symbol display device control unit 9160. Further, it is possible to store a plurality of variation patterns in advance according to the variation time, and to select each variation pattern according to the number of shot balls.

[0582] The accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021 has an accessory operation port entry detection switch (entrance detection mechanism) 9021c.
When a game ball is detected during opening, the opening operation of the accessory operation port (specific ball entry port) 9021 is terminated. This accessory operation port (specific entrance)
The opening operation of 9021 can be made shorter than the above interval time (fifteenth mode). That is, when the number of game media that have been detected by the ball-entering device in the unit game reaches the upper limit value in the unit game, the game proceeds to the next unit game after a predetermined time (eg, interval time) has elapsed. The operation time from the start to the end of the operation of the gaming device that operates according to the game mode is shorter than the above-mentioned predetermined time (for example, the interval time). ) The opening operation of 9021 can be prevented from being carried over to the next unit game. The role actor opening is an actuation opening operated by a role guiding device that operates based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the satisfaction of the predetermined condition means that a game ball enters a specific entrance of a game ball or is specified. Pass to a gate, or a case where a combination of specific symbols is displayed. On the other hand, the specific entrance is an entrance provided with a guidance increasing device operating area therein. Note that the accessory actuation opening ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9021c is such that entry detection is effective when the accessory accessory guidance device is operating (14th aspect). .

[0583] The game ball that entered the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021 is the guidance increasing device operation area (specific entry area) 9
019a or a non-operation area (discharge port / non-specific ball entry area / area outside the operation area) 9019b, 9019b.
A guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9019d is provided inside the guidance increase device operation region (specific ball entry region) 9019a, and the guidance increase device operation region passage detection switch (ball entry ball) is provided. Detection mechanism) 901
9d is a predetermined time period (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the detection of the game ball is performed by the accessory operation port entrance detection switch 9021c of the accessory operation port (specific entrance opening) 9021. Only valid for a while. In other words, when there is no detection of a game ball in the accessory actuation port entrance ball detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9021c, or after a lapse of a predetermined time from the detection, a guidance increasing device activation area (specific ball entry) It is made impossible to generate a special game state by entering a ball into the (region) 9019a (eleventh mode). In addition, a guidance device 90 connected from the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021
It is preferable to provide the above-mentioned predetermined time after the detection in consideration of the case where the game ball moves in the inside 20a. It should be noted that the game ball enters the guidance increasing device operation area 9019a or passes through the non-operation areas 9019b and 9019b (the non-operation area 9019a).
b, 9019b can also be provided with a passage detection switch).
(Ball entry detection mechanism) becomes invalid.

The effective time of the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9019d of the guidance increase device operation region (specific ball entry region) 9019a is determined by the role of the accessory actuation port (specific ball entry port) 9021. A predetermined number of times (e.g., 2) from the detection of the ball entry by the object entry ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9021c to the end of the unit game in which the detection was performed, or from the unit game in which the detection was performed.
Until the unit game of the number of times is completed, or the like.
In addition, as an opportunity of validity, the actor opening (special entrance)
Reference numeral 9021 indicates a state in which the movable piece (opening / closing plate) of the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021 operates in addition to the detection of the entry of the accessory operation port entry detection switch (entrance detection mechanism) 9021c. Or guide symbol display device (variable display device) 90
After the specific symbol display mode in which the accessory guiding device operates at 17 is also possible. It should be noted that a special object operation port (specific ball entrance) 9021 of the special object operation port ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9021c is described in the guide symbol display device (variable display device) 9017 with the specific symbol display mode described above. It can be valid only when it becomes.
That is, the guide symbol display device (variable display device) 9017
, The accessory actuation opening ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9021c is activated, and the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9019d based on the entry ball detection is displayed. Is activated, and a special game state can be generated based on the detection of a game ball by the guidance increase device operation area passage detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9019d.

[0585] The passage (entering ball) of the game ball while the accessory guiding device is operating is invalidated in the accessory guiding device operating gate (detecting device for operating the accessory) 9026. The ball is not stored. In addition, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 9023 in the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 9023 c
When a ball is detected by the (ball detection mechanism), in the detected unit game, thereafter, the detection of the game ball by the role guiding device operation gate (the role detection detecting device) 9026 is invalidated. (A seventeenth aspect).

[0586] Accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 902
As described above, the ball 3 is provided with an accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) 9023c. The opening operation of the object operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 9023 is to be ended. Further, the score increasing device activated by the detection of the incoming ball can terminate the operation when the unit game which started the operation is terminated (twelfth aspect). In other words, the operation of the score increasing device can be set so as not to be carried over to the next unit game even when the combination of the entered balls is not established (score is established). In addition, when a ball entry is detected by a ball entry detection switch 9023c (ball entry detection mechanism) in the role actor opening (score increasing device operating port) 9023 in the role operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023, the detection is performed. After that, in the unit game, the opening time (operating time) of the accessory operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023 based on the detection of the game ball at the accessory guiding apparatus operating gate (operating apparatus detecting apparatus) 9026 is thereafter performed. Can be shortened (sixteenth aspect).

The gaming machine of each of the above embodiments can be provided with an error function. For example, in one unit game, a certain period of time (for example, about 5 seconds or more as a confirmation time for entering a ball into each ball entry device (ball entrance)) has elapsed since a game ball having a maximum of 16 balls to be launched is launched. After that, if all of the launched game balls do not enter the ball entry device (ball entry port), ball hitting error processing can be performed. This indicates that the game ball may be caught in the game area 9011 by an obstacle nail or the like. In such an error process, an error is notified to a display device (a display device for an error or a variable display device or the like can be used) provided on a front portion of the gaming machine 9001. In this case, the number of caught game balls can be calculated by subtracting the number of actually caught balls from 16 in particular, and the number of caught game balls can be displayed on the display device. Note that the error can be cleared by, for example, entering a game ball caught by a store clerk of a game store or the like into any one of the ball entry devices (ball entry ports). Note that the error control (including error detection) is mainly performed by the main control unit 9140 with reference to various switches and an incoming ball detection mechanism.

As another error function, for example, an invalid condition of a fired game ball can be provided. The number of game balls fired in the game area 9011 can be counted by calculating a difference from the detection result of the fire ball count switch 9094 and the foul ball sensor 9197, and is larger than the number of game balls fired. When the number of game balls reaches the ball entry device (ball entry port) in one unit game, the entry is invalidated and error processing is performed. Specifically, when the error occurs, various switches of each ball entry device (ball entry port) and the ball entry detection mechanism are invalidated,
An error display may be performed by an error display device or the like. In addition, an accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 902
When a predetermined time (discharge confirmation time: for example, 10 seconds) elapses after the game ball enters the first game ball 1, the game ball that has entered the ball increases the guiding increase device operating area 9019a or the non-operating area 9019.
b, and 9019b, the error processing may be performed.

In the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, as shown in FIG. 4, a game ball that has entered a ball entry port (ball entry device or ball entry area) or the like formed in the game area 11 is Panel 10
Via the guide gutters 50 to 55 arranged on the back side of
Predetermined position (ball entrance) of 16 consecutive ball entry devices 24 (see FIG. 2)
It is supposed to enter the ball. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123, 16 game balls that have entered the ball entry ports (ball entry device or ball entry area) 9023, 9019a, 9019b, etc. (see FIG. 88) formed in the game area 9010 are continuously entered. Ball device 9
024 (see FIG. 88). That is, each ball entrance (ball entry device or ball entry area) 9
A ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) (not shown) is provided in each of 023, 9019a, 9019b, and the like.
025 (see FIG. 88), and control can be performed such that a predetermined position is lit.
5, 9057 to 9060, etc., directly
Is guided to the outside of the pachinko machine 9001 (discharged). In the case where a ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection mechanism) is provided at each entry port other than the 16-piece entry device, the entry port detection switch (input component) of the entry port of the 16-piece entry device is again provided. There is no need to detect an incoming ball by the ball detecting mechanism), and an incoming ball detection signal from the incoming ball detection switch (input ball sensing mechanism) is input to the game information output circuit 1347 shown in FIG. 43 or FIG. , Direct test equipment 1
807 (see FIG. 89) can output the information on the detection of the incoming ball. Therefore, it may be possible to contribute to facilitation of inspection by a third-party inspection organization. In addition, each penetration hole 9047 corresponding to each ball entrance of the 16 consecutive ball unit 9024 is also connected to the collecting gutter 9056, and all the game balls that have entered the respective ball entrances of the 16 consecutive ball unit 9024 are collected. It is discharged outside the pachinko machine 9001.

[0590] As a prize mode of the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, a payout control mode of game balls (prize balls) will be described. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the payout of the game balls is performed when the prize mode (score) is obtained (a nineteenth mode). After the payout of the game balls, a valid ball is detected to enter into the accessory operating port (score increasing apparatus operating port) 9023, and when the score increasing apparatus is activated, the increase due to the activation of the score increasing apparatus at the time of the activation. It is supposed to pay out minutes of game balls. In addition, the payout of the game ball of the increase by the operation of the score increasing device is performed when the 16th firing of the activated unit game is completed, or
It can also be performed when the second ball is detected, or when the next unit game following the activated unit game is started, and furthermore, the payout is performed when the operation end of all gaming devices is confirmed. It is also possible to do. It is also possible to pay out the game balls after the end of the interval time, and it is also possible to pay out the game balls after a lapse of a predetermined time (game check time) after the operation of all the gaming devices is finished. is there.

Next, the launcher control board 1201 (FIG. 38)
The launching motor 1093 connected to the launch area 1011 (see FIG. 23).
This is a motor for operating a firing hammer for driving the motor, and the operation of the motor 1093 can be detected and output to the outside (twentieth aspect). For example, a firing motor detection switch (not shown) for detecting that the firing device is operating is provided in the firing device unit 1008 (see FIG. 24), and the detection signal is sent to the main control unit 1140 (see FIG. 25). It may be possible to determine whether or not the launch device is operating. Also, a detection signal from the firing motor detection switch is transmitted from a test terminal (not shown) to a test device 1807.
(See FIG. 25) to determine the firing timing, that is, the start timing of the game. Therefore, it may be possible to perform an accurate and quick test by a third party inspection organization.

Next, the operation timing of the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings (timing chart: the horizontal axis represents time). First, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 94, the interval function is started after the 16th game ball is launched by the launch device and the launch count is performed, but the interval time (for example, 2 seconds) is reduced. If the 16th game ball is detected by the entrance detection sensor during the course of the passage, and the entering symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for confirming the entering symbol has elapsed, the game After the result is obtained and the game confirmation time (for example, 1.5 ms) elapses, the next unit game is started after the remaining interval time elapses (a thirteenth mode). On the other hand, if the entered symbol confirmation time has not elapsed after the elapse of the interval time, as shown in FIG. 95, the game does not proceed to the next unit game until all the entered balls have been confirmed. When the last game ball has entered the ball, the entered ball symbol confirmation time starts, the entered ball symbol confirmation time elapses, the result of the game is obtained, and after the game confirmation time elapses, the next unit game starts. It is to be started.

When the 16th game ball hit becomes a foul ball, as shown in FIG. 96, the operation of the firing device stops immediately after the 16th hit, but the foul ball detection sensor Based on the detection of 9197, the launching device starts operating to launch one game ball. Then, the interval function is activated after the shortage is completed.

The sixteenth game ball is the guide symbol operation gate 9.
In the case where the guiding symbol display device 9017 is still operating even after passing through No. 016 and the entering symbol confirmation time and the interval time have ended, as shown in FIG. 97, the entering symbol display device 902
5 is continued, and when the final display is made on the guide symbol display device 9017, the game result is obtained and the game confirmation time is started, and after that, the entering symbol display device 9
025 is not displayed (turned off) and the next unit game is started.

The 16th game ball is the guide symbol operation gate 9.
FIG. 98 shows a case where a combination of symbols that passes through 016 and that causes the guide symbol display device 9017 to open (operate the accessory guide device) the accessory operation port (specific entrance opening) 9021 is displayed. As shown in the figure, after a game confirmation time elapses from the time when the accessory operation port (specific entrance opening) 9021 starts operating (the accessory guide device starts operating) and the game result is obtained, the next unit The game is to be started.

[0596] The sixteenth game ball enters the special object operation port (specific ball entry port) 9021, and the non-operation areas 9019b and 901 are activated.
99b, that is, as shown in FIG. 99, after a ball entry detection switch (portal entry opening ball detection mechanism) 9021c detects a ball entry, the non-operation area (non-specific entry) is detected. When a game ball is detected by the guidance increase device non-operation area passage detection switch (discharge ball passage detection mechanism) 9019e provided in the ball area 9019b, 9019b, the result of the game is obtained, and the game confirmation time starts. After that, the next unit game is started.

The 16th game ball enters the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021, and the guidance increasing device operation area 9019
100a, that is, as shown in FIG. 100, a ball entry opening detection switch (access mechanism entry mechanism).
If the passage of the guidance increase device operation area 9019a is detected after the ball is detected at 9021c, the guidance increase device is activated and the game result is obtained. Then, the game confirmation time is started, and after that, the next unit game is started.

The winning ball payout device (payout device) 1109 (FIG. 2)
4) is operating even after the interval time or the entering symbol confirmation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 101, the result of the game is obtained after the operation of the prize ball payout device 1109 is completely stopped. Then, the game confirmation time is started, and after that, the next unit game is started.

When the error function operates, as shown in FIG. 102, the result of the game is obtained after removing the cause of the error, the game confirmation time starts, and after that, the next unit game starts. It is supposed to be.

Next, the operation of the gate, the entrance, the accessory port and the device will be described with reference to a timing chart. First, the game ball is moved to the accessory operation port 9021 or 901.
When the ball enters the entrance of 23, the accessory (main control unit 9140) operates as shown in FIG. 103, and when the entry symbol relating to the accessory is displayed on the entry symbol display device 9025, the operation is terminated. It is assumed.

[0601] When the combination of symbols for operating the character accessory guidance device is displayed on the guidance symbol display device 9017,
As shown in FIG. 104, the accessory guiding device operates and the entrance of the accessory operating port (specific entrance) 9021 is opened. However,
During the operation of the accessory guiding device, the passing of the game ball through the guiding symbol operation gate 9016 is invalid including the operation of the guiding symbol display device 9017.

[0602] When a game ball enters the entrance of the special agent operation port (specific ball entry port) 9021, or a unit game without the game ball entering the entrance of the special substance operation port (specific entry port) 9021 105 has passed a predetermined number of times (for example, two times), FIG.
As shown at 06, the entrance of the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 9021 is closed.

If the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026 during the operation of the guiding increasing device, as shown in FIG. 107, the accessory guiding device is activated and the accessory operating opening (score increasing device operating opening). 9023 is opened. However, during the operation of the accessory guidance device, the accessory guidance device operation gate 9026
Passing of game balls to is invalidated.

[0606] Accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 902
3. The operation of the accessory guiding device and the score increasing device is shown in FIG.
As shown in the figure, the accessory operation port (score increase device operation port) 90
When a game ball enters the entrance of 23, or FIG.
When the unit game ends, the respective operations are ended as shown in FIG.

When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 9016 and is detected, as shown in FIG. 110, the guide symbol display device 9017 starts to operate, and when a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation is activated. It is assumed that the combination of symbols is completed and displayed. However, the guide symbol display device 90
During the operation of 17, the passage of the game ball through the guide symbol operation gate 9016 is invalidated.

Control Timing of Guidance Symbol FIG. 11
It is shown in FIG. The symbol display device control unit 9160 includes the main control unit 91
In accordance with the command transmitted from 40, display control of the guide symbol is performed. The main control unit 9140
The commands transmitted from the following are 1) a command for designating a variation pattern, that the symbol starts to vary upon receipt of the command (variable pattern designation command), and 2) a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when variation is stopped. A command is sent during the command (command for designating symbols) 3) A command for designating variation of all symbols, and the variation of symbols is stopped by command reception (command for stopping all symbols),
It satisfies the condition.

[0607] The game ball moves to the guidance increasing device operating area 9019a.
, The induction increasing device starts operating as shown in FIG. During the operation of the guidance increase device, the accessory guidance device operation gate 9026 is made effective.

As shown in FIG. 113, the operation of the guidance increasing device is started when the unit game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 14 times) since the start of the operation of the guidance increasing device, or as shown in FIG. 114. Ball is the guidance increase device operation area 901
It is assumed that the process ends when the vehicle passes 9a.

[0609] Actuator opening (scoring increase device opening) 902
When a game ball enters the entrance 3, the score increasing device starts operating as shown in FIG. 115, and when the unit game ends, the operation ends. However, during the operation of the score increasing device, the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026
Passing of the game ball is invalid.

Regarding the operation timing of the error function,
As shown in FIG. 116, for example, when the interval time ends and the total number of game balls entering the entrance is less than 16 after a predetermined time (fixed time) from the start of operation of the launching device, the error function is disabled. It is supposed to work. Also, as shown in FIG. 117, the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 902
When the game ball that has entered the entrance of No. 1 is not ejected, that is, the accessory actuation port entry detection switch of the accessory actuation port (specific entry entrance) 9021 (actuation actuation port entry ball sensing mechanism) 902
Even if a predetermined time (fixed time) has passed after the detection of the game ball by 1c, the guidance increase device non-operation area passage detection switch 90
The error function is activated when the passage of the game ball is not detected by 19e (discharge ball passage detection mechanism). Further, as shown in FIG. 118, the prize ball payout device 11
09 (see FIG. 24) (for example, when the prize ball payout device 1109 operates even after the interval time and the entering symbol confirmation time have elapsed), for example, the error function is activated when the abnormality is detected. You can do it.

The cancellation of the error function can be performed, for example, when the total number of game balls entering the entrance is less than 16:
As shown in FIG. 119, when a short game ball enters the entrance, the game ball is released. In addition, when the game ball that has entered the entrance of the accessory operation port (specific entry port) 9021 is not ejected, the error occurs as shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the ball is in the non-operation area passage detection switch 9019 for the guidance increase device.
e (discharge ball passage detection mechanism) is released. Further, a prize ball payout device 1109 (FIG. 2)
As shown in FIG. 121, the error when an abnormality occurs in (4) is removed when the cause of the prize ball abnormality is removed and, for example, all the insufficient game balls are paid out.

Next, FIG. 122 is a timing chart of the operation of the gate, the entrance to the ball, the accessory port, and the device during the game until the operation of the guidance increasing device is completed.
Shown in When the game ball passes through the guide symbol operation gate 9016, the function of the guide symbol operation gate 9016 becomes invalid, and the guide symbol display device 9017 starts operating. Then, when the combination of symbols for which the accessory guiding device is to be operated is confirmed and displayed, the accessory guiding device is activated and the entrance of the accessory operating port (specific ball entrance) 9021 is opened. When the game ball is detected as entering the ball, the accessory guiding device terminates its operation, and when the entrance of the accessory operating port (specific entry port) 9021 is closed, the function of the guide symbol operating gate 9016 is enabled again. Becomes When a ball is detected by the ball entry opening detection switch 9021c (gear entry opening detection mechanism), the entry (for example, a predetermined number of 2 to 4 entry balls is displayed). The device for displaying on the ball entry symbol display device 9025) is activated, and the ball entry symbol display device 9025 illuminates and displays a predetermined ball entry symbol.

[0613] Also, the accessory operation port (specific entrance port) 9021
When the game ball that has entered the ball passes through the guidance increasing device operation area 9019a, the guidance increasing device starts operating. When the guidance increasing device is activated, a special game state is set, and the special game state is continued until a maximum of 14 unit games are completed. When the guidance increasing device is operated to enter the special game state, the passage of the game ball through the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026 is enabled (the function of the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026 is enabled). When the game ball passes through the accessory guiding device operation gate 9026,
The function of the gate 9026 is invalidated, and the entrance of the accessory operation port (score increasing apparatus operation port) 9023 is opened. When the game ball enters the bonus item operating port (score increasing device operating port) 9023 by opening, the accessory is activated, a predetermined entering symbol is displayed on the entering symbol display device 9025, and the score increasing device is activated. Operate. Then, the operation of the score increasing device is stopped when the unit game is over, the function of the accessory guiding device operating gate 9026 is restored, and the gate 90 is activated.
The passage of 26 game balls is activated. Such a special game state continues up to a maximum of 14 times, and the operation of the guidance increasing device is stopped by the end of the 14th unit game, and the function of the accessory guidance device operating gate 9026 is invalidated.

[0614] In the present invention, "the game result is obtained" means that all the game areas formed in the game area, such as the time when the game confirmation time rises (starts) or the time when the entered symbol confirmation time ends, are determined. This refers to the point in time when the operation of the gaming device has been completed. The game confirmation time refers to a time during which all signals are turned off in order to clarify the division of a unit game.

The embodiments of the present invention have been described above.
The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the wording of each claim unless it deviates from the scope described in each claim, and extends to the range easily replaced by those skilled in the art. Further, improvements based on ordinary knowledge of a person skilled in the art can be appropriately added.

[Brief description of the drawings]

FIG. 1 is a front view of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine as a first embodiment.

FIG. 2 is a front view showing a game board of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 3 is a partial explanatory view of a launch site of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine;

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a game ball path and the like on the back of the game board of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine;

FIG. 5 is a rear view of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 6 is a partial block diagram of an electronic control device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a main routine executed by a main control unit CPU of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a random number update routine executed by a main control unit CPU of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a winning symbol display routine executed by a main control unit CPU of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 10: Main control unit CPU of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine
5 is a flowchart of a score calculation routine executed by the CPU.

FIG. 11 is a main control unit CPU of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine.
9 is a flowchart of a table selection routine executed by the user.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 18: Main control unit CPU of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine
6 is a flowchart of a chance time processing routine executed by the user.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram of a table displayed on the winning symbol combination display device of the arrangement ball type pachinko machine.

FIG. 20: Main control unit CPU of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine
6 is a flowchart of a probability improvement routine executed by the computer.

FIG. 21 is a main control unit CPU of an arrangement ball type pachinko machine;
6 is a flowchart of a base correction processing routine executed by the CPU.

FIG. 22 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment.

FIG. 23 is a schematic front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22.

FIG. 24 is a rear view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22;

FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of the electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 22.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the audio output device control board.

FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing various game devices connected to the lamp output device control board.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board.

FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing various game devices connected to the frame relay board.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main job in the electronic control device of FIG. 25;

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game start job.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the flow of a random number update job.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the flow of a symbol display job.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the flow of a score calculation job.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a CPU of a main control unit and a frame control unit.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the flow of an interval timer set job.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing various game devices connected to the launch device control board.

FIG. 39 is a schematic front view showing a modification of the game board configuration.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of a guide symbol display job.

FIG. 41 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a board connection layout in a power supply unit of the electronic control unit.

FIG. 42 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a power supply monitoring circuit.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state between a main control unit and an external test device.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing a modification of FIG. 43;

FIG. 45 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment.

FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an example of the electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 45.

FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

FIG. 48 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the flow of a judgment symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment.

FIG. 51 is a block diagram showing an example of an electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 50.

FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the flow of a second symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 56 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a fifth embodiment.

FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing an example of an electronic control unit of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the flow of a symbol display job for determining the number of times of operation of the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 61 is a schematic front view showing a modification of the game board configuration of the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 62 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment.

FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an example of an electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 62.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the flow of a judgment symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment.

FIG. 67 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment.

FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an example of the electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 67.

FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the flow of a guide symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 72 is a schematic front view showing a game board configuration of a first modification of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 73 is a schematic front view showing a game board configuration of a second modified example of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 74 is a schematic front view showing a game board configuration of a third modification of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 75 is a schematic front view showing a game board configuration of a fourth modification of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 76 is a schematic front view showing the structure of a game board according to a fifth modification of the pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 77 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment.

FIG. 78 is a block diagram showing an example of an electronic control unit of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 77.

FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the flow of a judgment symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 82 is a schematic front view showing a modification of the game board configuration of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment.

FIG. 83 is a schematic front view of a game board of a pachinko machine according to a ninth embodiment.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an example of the electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 83.

FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment.

FIG. 86 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the flow of a guide symbol display job of the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment.

FIG. 88 is a schematic front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment.

89 is a block diagram showing an example of the electronic control device of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 89.

FIG. 90 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the symbol display device control board of the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 91 is a block diagram showing various game machines connected to the relay board of the pachinko machine of the tenth embodiment.

FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing an example of a pulse width increasing means.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of a variation pattern selection job.

FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 98 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 102 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 103 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 104 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 106 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 107 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 109 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 110 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 112 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 113 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 114 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 115 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 116 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 117 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 118 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 119 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 120 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 121 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of the embodiment.

FIG. 122 is a timing chart showing an example of operation timing of the gaming machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a game ball path and the like on the back of the game board.

[Explanation of symbols]

A, 1001 to 8001 Arranged ball type pachinko machine (pachinko machine (game machine)) 16 Guidance symbol display device (variable display device) 18 Specific entrance port 19 Upper agent operation port 22 Local object operation port (first variable input ball) Device (guidance increasing device)) 24 16 consecutive ball entry devices 25 Entering ball symbol display device (identification information display device (winning symbol display device)) 140, 1140 to 8140 Main control unit (guidance increasing device, special game generating device, pass / fail) Determination means, prize mode increasing device) 150, 1160 to 8160 symbol display device control unit (symbol control unit)

──────────────────────────────────────────────────続 き Continued on the front page (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-361578 (P2000-361578) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (November 28, 2000) (33) Countries claiming priority Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-361579 (P2000-361579) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (November 28, 2000) (33) Priority claim country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-361580 (P2000-361580) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (November 28, 2000) (33) Priority claim country Japan (JP) (31) ) Priority claim number Japanese Patent Application No. 2000-361581 (P2000-361581) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (November 28, 2000) (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority Claim No. 2000-361582 (P2000-361582) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (Nov. 28, 2000) (33) Priority claiming country Japan (JP) (31) Priority claim number Application No. 2000-361583 (P2000-361583) (32) Priority date November 28, 2000 (November 28, 2000) (33) Country claiming priority Japan (JP) Application for accelerated examination (72) Inventor Kenichi Itakura 125 Tyoyo Elec Co., Ltd., Nishi-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi Prefecture (72) Inventor Hiroki Hiramatsu 125 Tyoyo Elec Co., Ltd., Nishi-ku, Nagoya City, Aichi Prefecture (56) References JP-A 2000-107356 (Japanese) JP, A) JP-A-4-170978 (JP, A) (58) Fields investigated (Int. Cl. ⁷ , DB name) A63F 7/02

Claims (4)

(57) [Claims] 1. A set number of game balls are fired during a unit game,
In the gaming machine, which displays a ball entry pattern related to the entry of game balls into a plurality of entry areas in the unit game, and determines a prize mode based on a combination of the entry symbols, the set number during the unit game A launch ball count switch that detects the launch of a game ball and outputs a launch detection pulse signal; and a launch ball counting unit that counts the number of launches of game balls in the unit game based on the input of the launch detection pulse signal. A pulse width increasing means provided between the launch ball count switch and the launch ball counting means to increase the pulse width of the launch detection pulse signal; a guide symbol operating gate for detecting the passage of a game ball; and the guide symbol A guide symbol display device that variably displays based on the detection of the passage of a game ball at the operation gate; A variable display pattern determining means for selecting a variable display pattern, wherein the detection is stopped until the next unit game can be started from the detection of the last game ball being fired during the unit game, and the set number A predetermined time interval is set after the last game ball is fired out of the game balls, and an entry pattern confirmation time to be started when the last game ball enters is set. When checking the ball pattern
When the game result is not obtained even after the time has elapsed
To continue the unit game in, when the induced pattern display apparatus is displayed finalized, when the predetermined combination of induction symbols in the induced pattern display apparatus is displayed, character object operating port (the specific ball entrance opening) when the character object inductive device for opening operation starts the operation, after the game ball had ball entrance detected ball entrance and won game operating port ball entrance sensing mechanism on the won game actuating port (specific ball entrance opening), the When the passage of the game ball through the guidance increase device operation area is detected by the guidance increase device operation region passage detection switch and the guidance increase device is activated , the game ball is moved forward.
Entry into the working object opening (specified entrance) and feeling of entering the working opening
After an ball entrance detection in known mechanisms, when the induced increase device inoperative region passage detection switch the passage of the induction increasing device inoperative region of the game ball is detected, the operation is completely stopped in dispensing apparatus <br/> time points, and error functions cause is actuated error <br/> been removed at the slowest time of any point of time, that the error function is completed, binding of the game
The game confirmation time is set as a result obtained, and the next unit game can be started after the end of the game confirmation time, and the error function starts from the start of the operation of the firing device after the interval time ends. If the total number of game balls that have entered the plurality of entry areas after a fixed time is less than a set number, or the guidance increase after a fixed time after the role-actuating-operating-port entrance ball detection mechanism detects a game ball. A gaming machine which is activated when the passing of the game ball is not detected by the device non-operation area passage detection switch or when a prize ball abnormality occurs in the payout device. 2. The variable display pattern determining means selects a variable display pattern having a relatively short variation time when the number of shot balls in the unit game is half or more than the set number. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein 3. When the game result is obtained after the interval time and the entry symbol confirmation time have elapsed, the game confirmation time is after the interval time and the entry symbol confirmation time have elapsed. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game is started when the result of the game is obtained, and the next unit game can be started after the game is finished. 4. 4. The game confirmation time is, during the period from the start to the end, the entered symbol confirmation time, the guide symbol display device, the accessory guiding device, the guidance increasing device, and the guidance increasing device not operating. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the time is a time when all signals of the area passing detection switch, the payout device, and the error function can be turned off.